Sei sulla pagina 1di 254

SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module

V100R010

Configuration Guide

Issue 02
Date 2008-12-12
Part Number 31503922

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any
assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide Contents

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................1


1 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal................................................................................1-1
1.1 Overview of the Maintenance Terminal..........................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Configuring the Terminal Through the Local Serial Port...............................................................................1-2
1.3 Configuring the Terminal Through the Inband Management Channel in ATM Mode...................................1-8
1.4 Configuring the Terminal Through the Inband Management Channel in LAN Mode.................................1-12

2 CLI Operation Basics.................................................................................................................2-1


2.1 Overview of CLI.............................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 CLI Features....................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2.1 Overview of Command Modes..............................................................................................................2-2
2.2.2 Intelligent Matching...............................................................................................................................2-4
2.2.3 Edit Function..........................................................................................................................................2-5
2.2.4 Smart Input.............................................................................................................................................2-5
2.2.5 Display Function....................................................................................................................................2-6
2.2.6 Saving History Commands.....................................................................................................................2-6
2.2.7 Command Line Error Prompts...............................................................................................................2-7
2.3 Basic Operations Through CLI.......................................................................................................................2-8
2.3.1 Obtaining Online Help Information.......................................................................................................2-9
2.3.2 Enabling the Interactive Mode for Running Commands.....................................................................2-10
2.3.3 Switching Terminal Language.............................................................................................................2-11
2.3.4 Setting the System Time......................................................................................................................2-11
2.3.5 Configuring the System Name.............................................................................................................2-11
2.3.6 Setting Timeout Exit Time...................................................................................................................2-12
2.3.7 Clearing the Screen..............................................................................................................................2-13
2.3.8 Querying the Version Information.......................................................................................................2-13
2.3.9 Querying the History Command..........................................................................................................2-13
2.3.10 Querying the Board CPU Utilization.................................................................................................2-14
2.3.11 Configuring the Help Mode...............................................................................................................2-14
2.3.12 Searching for a Command..................................................................................................................2-15
2.3.13 Configuring the Number of Lines Displayed on One Screen............................................................2-16
2.3.14 Configuring the Telnet Authority of a User.......................................................................................2-16
2.3.15 Saving System Data...........................................................................................................................2-17

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Contents Configuration Guide

2.3.16 Testing Network Status......................................................................................................................2-18

3 Configuring the Inband NMS.................................................................................................3-1


3.1 Overview of the Network Management System.............................................................................................3-3
3.2 Related NMS Concepts...................................................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Configuration Example of an Inband NMS in ATM Mode............................................................................3-4
3.4 Configuration Example of an Inband NMS in LAN Mode.............................................................................3-8
3.5 Configuring the SNMP Agent.......................................................................................................................3-12
3.5.1 Enabling the SNMP Agent Switch.......................................................................................................3-12
3.5.2 Configuring the Trap Packets Allowed to Transmit............................................................................3-13
3.5.3 Configuring the Administrator Contact Information...........................................................................3-14
3.5.4 Configuring the Device Location Information.....................................................................................3-15
3.5.5 Configuring the NMS Community Name............................................................................................3-16
3.6 Configuring the IP Address of the Inband Interface.....................................................................................3-17
3.7 Configuring a System Route.........................................................................................................................3-18
3.8 Configuring the Inband NMS PVC...............................................................................................................3-19
3.9 Configuring the Inband NMS VLAN............................................................................................................3-21

4 Configuring a Log Host.............................................................................................................4-1


4.1 Overview of the Log Host...............................................................................................................................4-2
4.2 Configuration Example of a Log Host............................................................................................................4-2
4.3 Adding a Log Host..........................................................................................................................................4-3
4.4 Deleting a Log Host........................................................................................................................................4-4
4.5 Activating a Log Host.....................................................................................................................................4-5
4.6 Deactivating a Log Host..................................................................................................................................4-5
4.7 Querying Logs.................................................................................................................................................4-6

5 Managing the User.....................................................................................................................5-1


5.1 Overview of Users...........................................................................................................................................5-2
5.2 Adding a User..................................................................................................................................................5-2
5.3 Modifying the User Attributes........................................................................................................................5-4
5.3.1 Modifying the User Level......................................................................................................................5-4
5.3.2 Modifying the User Password................................................................................................................5-5
5.3.3 Modifying the Telnet Authority of a User.............................................................................................5-6
5.4 Deleting a User................................................................................................................................................5-7

6 Managing the Board.................................................................................................................. 6-1


6.1 Overview of Board Management....................................................................................................................6-2
6.2 Adding a Service Board..................................................................................................................................6-2
6.3 Deleting a Service Board.................................................................................................................................6-4
6.4 Prohibiting a Service Board............................................................................................................................6-5

7 Configuring a PVC.....................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Overview of PVCs..........................................................................................................................................7-3
7.2 Related PVC Concepts....................................................................................................................................7-3

ii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide Contents

7.3 Configuring a Traffic Class.............................................................................................................................7-6


7.4 Configuring the ATM Traffic Profile..............................................................................................................7-7
7.5 Configuring a LAN Traffic Profile.................................................................................................................7-9
7.6 Configuring a Service PVC for the E1 Port..................................................................................................7-10
7.7 Configuring a Service PVC for the IMA Upstream Transmission...............................................................7-11
7.8 Configuring a PVC on a LAN Board............................................................................................................7-12
7.9 Configuring the Terminal Management PVC...............................................................................................7-13
7.10 Enabling the CAR Function of a PVC........................................................................................................7-14

8 Managing the MAC Address...................................................................................................8-1


8.1 Overview of the MAC Address.......................................................................................................................8-2
8.2 Configuring MAC Address Self-Learning......................................................................................................8-2
8.3 Configuring the Aging Time of a Dynamic MAC Address............................................................................8-3

9 Configuring User Security........................................................................................................9-1


9.1 Overview of User Security..............................................................................................................................9-2
9.2 Enabling PITP.................................................................................................................................................9-2
9.3 Enabling the PITP Option82 Function............................................................................................................9-3
9.4 Configuring the Encoding Format of PITP.....................................................................................................9-4
9.5 Configuring the Binding Between a PVC and an IP Address.........................................................................9-5
9.6 Configuring the Binding Between a PVC and a MAC Address.....................................................................9-6

10 Configuring QoS....................................................................................................................10-1
10.1 Overview of QoS.........................................................................................................................................10-2
10.2 Configuring the Mapping Between the CoS Priority and the Queue Scheduling.......................................10-2

11 Configuring System Security...............................................................................................11-1


11.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................11-2
11.2 Configuring an Accessible Address Segment.............................................................................................11-2
11.3 Configuring an Inaccessible Address Segment...........................................................................................11-3
11.4 Configuring the Source MAC Address Filtering........................................................................................11-4

12 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service...........................................................................12-1


12.1 Overview of LAN........................................................................................................................................12-3
12.2 Related LAN Concepts................................................................................................................................12-4
12.3 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service.....................................................................................................12-5
12.4 Configuring the Mode of a LAN Port.........................................................................................................12-7
12.5 Configuring a Service VLAN.....................................................................................................................12-9
12.6 Configuring Subtending Levels and the Forwarding Range.....................................................................12-10
12.7 Configuring Traffic Suppression...............................................................................................................12-11
12.8 Configuring the Loopback of a LAN Port................................................................................................12-13
12.8.1 Configuring the Logic Loopback.....................................................................................................12-13
12.8.2 Configuring the PHY loopback........................................................................................................12-14
12.8.3 Configuring the UTOPIA Loopback................................................................................................12-15
12.9 Disabling the LAN Port.............................................................................................................................12-16

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Contents Configuration Guide

12.10 Disabling the UTOPIA Port....................................................................................................................12-17

13 Configuring IMA Upstream Transmission.......................................................................13-1


13.1 Overview of the IMA Upstream Service.....................................................................................................13-3
13.2 Configuration Example of the IMA Upstream Service...............................................................................13-3
13.3 Adding an IMA Group................................................................................................................................13-6
13.4 Enabling the CRC4 Function of an IMA Group.........................................................................................13-8
13.5 Enabling the Scramble Function of an IMA Group....................................................................................13-9
13.6 Adding an IMA Link.................................................................................................................................13-10
13.7 Enabling the Auto Reset Function of an IMA Group...............................................................................13-11
13.8 Disabling the UTOPIA Port......................................................................................................................13-12
13.9 Configuring the IMA Loopback................................................................................................................13-14
13.9.1 Configuring the LIU Loopback........................................................................................................13-14
13.9.2 Configuring the Logic Loopback.....................................................................................................13-16

14 Configuring the E1 Upstream Service................................................................................14-1


14.1 Overview of the E1 Upstream Service........................................................................................................14-2
14.2 Configuration Example of E1 Upstream Transmission..............................................................................14-2
14.3 Enabling the CRC4 Function of the E1 Port...............................................................................................14-4
14.4 Disabling the E1 Port..................................................................................................................................14-5
14.5 Disabling the UTOPIA Port........................................................................................................................14-6
14.6 Configuring the E1 Loopback.....................................................................................................................14-6
14.6.1 Configuring the LIU Loopback..........................................................................................................14-7
14.6.2 Configuring the ETU Loopback.........................................................................................................14-8
14.6.3 Configuring the Logic Loopback.......................................................................................................14-9

15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service.......................................................................................15-1


15.1 Overview of the ADSL2+ Service..............................................................................................................15-3
15.2 Configuration Example of the ADSL2+PPPoE Access Service.................................................................15-3
15.3 Adding an ADSL2+ Line Profile................................................................................................................15-7
15.4 Adding an ADSL2+ Alarm Profile...........................................................................................................15-11
15.5 Activating an ADSL2+ Port......................................................................................................................15-16
15.6 Binding an ADSL2+ Alarm Profile..........................................................................................................15-17
15.7 Blocking an ADSL2+ Port........................................................................................................................15-18
15.8 Resetting the ADSL2+ Chipset.................................................................................................................15-20

16 Configuring the SHDSL Service.........................................................................................16-1


16.1 Overview of the SHDSL Service................................................................................................................16-3
16.2 Configuration Example of the SHDSL PPPoE Service..............................................................................16-3
16.3 Adding an SHDSL Line Profile..................................................................................................................16-7
16.4 Adding an SHDSL Alarm Profile.............................................................................................................16-11
16.5 Binding an SHDSL Alarm Profile............................................................................................................16-15
16.6 Activating an SHDSL Port........................................................................................................................16-16
16.7 Blocking an SHDSL Port..........................................................................................................................16-17
16.8 Configuring the SHDSL Port Loopback...................................................................................................16-18

iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide Contents

16.9 Configuring the Power Compensation of the SHDSL Port.......................................................................16-20


16.10 Resetting the SHDSL Chipset.................................................................................................................16-20

17 Configuring the Multicast Service......................................................................................17-1


17.1 Overview of the Multicast Service..............................................................................................................17-2
17.2 Configuration Example of the Multicast Service........................................................................................17-2
17.3 Configuring Multicast Attributes................................................................................................................17-6
17.3.1 Configuring the Multicast Working Mode.........................................................................................17-6
17.3.2 Configuring the Multicast VPI/VCI...................................................................................................17-7
17.3.3 Configuring User Leave Delay..........................................................................................................17-8
17.3.4 Configuring the User Query Interval.................................................................................................17-9
17.3.5 Enabling the Information Function of User Login.............................................................................17-9
17.4 Adding a Multicast Program.....................................................................................................................17-10
17.5 Configuring a Multicast Authority Profile................................................................................................17-11
17.6 Adding a Multicast User...........................................................................................................................17-13

18 Configuring ATM OAM.......................................................................................................18-1


18.1 Overview of OAM......................................................................................................................................18-2
18.2 Configuring the OAM Attribute..................................................................................................................18-2
18.3 Enabling the CC Function...........................................................................................................................18-3
18.4 Inserting an OAM Cell................................................................................................................................18-4
18.5 Configuring the OAM Loopback................................................................................................................18-5
18.5.1 Configuring the Identification of the OAM Loopback Point.............................................................18-5
18.5.2 Configuring the OAM Cell Loopback at the ATM Side....................................................................18-6
18.5.3 Configuring the OAM Loopback at the xDSL Side...........................................................................18-7

A Acronyms & Abbreviations...................................................................................................A-1


Index.................................................................................................................................................i-1

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide Figures

Figures

Figure 1-1 Networking for configuring the maintenance terminal through the local serial port.........................1-3
Figure 1-2 Flowchart for configuring the maintenance terminal through the local serial port............................1-3
Figure 1-3 Setting up a connection.......................................................................................................................1-4
Figure 1-4 Selecting the serial port to be connected............................................................................................1-4
Figure 1-5 Setting parameters of the HyperTerminal...........................................................................................1-5
Figure 1-6 HyperTerminal interface.....................................................................................................................1-6
Figure 1-7 Setting the terminal emulation type....................................................................................................1-7
Figure 1-8 Setting the ASCII code.......................................................................................................................1-8
Figure 1-9 Networking for maintenance through the inband management channel in ATM mode....................1-9
Figure 1-10 Flowchart for maintenance through the inband management channel in ATM mode...................1-10
Figure 1-11 Networking for configuring the inband management channel in LAN mode................................1-12
Figure 1-12 Flowchart for configuring the inband management channel in LAN mode...................................1-14
Figure 2-1 Command mode switching.................................................................................................................2-3
Figure 3-1 Networking for configuring the inband NMS in ATM mode............................................................3-5
Figure 3-2 Flowchart for configuring the inband NMS in ATM mode...............................................................3-6
Figure 3-3 Sample network for configuring the inband NMS in LAN mode......................................................3-9
Figure 3-4 Flowchart for configuring the inband NMS in LAN mode..............................................................3-10
Figure 4-1 Networking for configuring the log host............................................................................................4-2
Figure 12-1 Subtending configuration of the MA5105......................................................................................12-4
Figure 12-2 Networking for configuring the LAN upstream service.................................................................12-5
Figure 12-3 Flowchart for configuring the LAN upstream service....................................................................12-6
Figure 12-4 Flowchart for configuring the LAN port mode..............................................................................12-8
Figure 13-1 Networking for configuring the IMA upstream transmission .......................................................13-4
Figure 13-2 Flowchart for configuring the IMA upstream transmission ..........................................................13-5
Figure 14-1 Networking for configuring the E1 upstream transmission............................................................14-2
Figure 14-2 Flowchart for configuring the E1 upstream transmission...............................................................14-3
Figure 15-1 Networking for configuring the ADSL2+ access service...............................................................15-3
Figure 15-2 Flowchart for configuring the ADSL2+ access service..................................................................15-5
Figure 15-3 Flowchart for configuring an ADSL2+ line profile .......................................................................15-8
Figure 15-4 Flowchart for adding an ADSL2+ alarm profile..........................................................................15-12
Figure 16-1 Networking for configuring the SHDSL service............................................................................16-4
Figure 16-2 Flowchart for configuring the SHDSL service...............................................................................16-5
Figure 16-3 Flowchart for adding an SHDSL line profile.................................................................................16-8

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Figures Configuration Guide

Figure 16-4 Flowchart for adding an SHDSL alarm profile............................................................................16-12


Figure 17-1 Networking for the IGMP snooping multicast service...................................................................17-3
Figure 17-2 Flowchart for configuring the IGMP snooping multicast service..................................................17-4

viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide Tables

Tables

Table 1-1 Features of the methods of configuring the maintenance terminal......................................................1-2


Table 1-2 Data plan for maintenance through the inband management channel in ATM mode..........................1-9
Table 1-3 Data plan for configuring the inband management channel in LAN mode.......................................1-13
Table 2-1 Functions of each interface or port configuration mode......................................................................2-4
Table 2-2 Edit functions.......................................................................................................................................2-5
Table 2-3 Display functions................................................................................................................................. 2-6
Table 2-4 Common error prompts for command lines.........................................................................................2-7
Table 2-5 Related operation for obtaining online help information...................................................................2-10
Table 2-6 Related operation for enabling the interactive mode.........................................................................2-10
Table 2-7 Related operation for setting the timeout exit time............................................................................2-12
Table 2-8 Related operation for enabling the help mode switch........................................................................2-15
Table 2-9 Related operation for configuring the number of lines displayed on one screen...............................2-16
Table 2-10 Related operation for configuring the telnet authority.....................................................................2-17
Table 2-11 Related operation for saving system data.........................................................................................2-18
Table 3-1 Data plan for configuring the inband NMS in ATM mode..................................................................3-5
Table 3-2 Data plan for configuring the inband NMS in LAN mode.................................................................. 3-9
Table 3-3 Related operation for enable the SNMP agent switch........................................................................3-13
Table 3-4 Related operation for configuring the Trap packets allowed to transmit...........................................3-14
Table 3-5 Related operation for configuring the administrator contact information..........................................3-15
Table 3-6 Related operation for configuring the device location information...................................................3-16
Table 3-7 Related operation for configuring the NMS community name..........................................................3-17
Table 3-8 Related operation for configuring the IP address of the inband interface..........................................3-18
Table 3-9 Related operation for configuring a system route..............................................................................3-19
Table 3-10 Related operation for configuring the inband NMS PVC................................................................3-20
Table 3-11 Related operation for configuring the inband NMS VLAN.............................................................3-21
Table 4-1 Data plan for configuring the log host................................................................................................. 4-3
Table 4-2 Related operation for adding a log host............................................................................................... 4-4
Table 4-3 Related operation for deleting a log host............................................................................................. 4-5
Table 4-4 Related operation for activating a log host...........................................................................................4-5
Table 4-5 Related operation for deactivating a log host.......................................................................................4-6
Table 5-1 Authority for users of all levels............................................................................................................5-2
Table 5-2 User attributes...................................................................................................................................... 5-3
Table 5-3 Related operation for adding a user......................................................................................................5-4

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Tables Configuration Guide

Table 5-4 Related operation for modifying the user level....................................................................................5-5


Table 5-5 Related operation for changing the user password...............................................................................5-6
Table 5-6 Related operation for modifying the user login mode..........................................................................5-7
Table 5-7 Related operation for deleting a user....................................................................................................5-8
Table 6-1 Boards supported by the MA5105.......................................................................................................6-2
Table 6-2 Service board status..............................................................................................................................6-2
Table 6-3 Related operation for adding a service board.......................................................................................6-3
Table 6-4 Related operation for deleting a service board.....................................................................................6-5
Table 7-1 PVC features of the MA5105...............................................................................................................7-3
Table 7-2 Mapping between the traffic types and parameters..............................................................................7-4
Table 7-3 Parameters of the rt-VBR service (with traffic type NO_CLP_SCR_CDV).......................................7-6
Table 7-4 Related operation for configuring a traffic class..................................................................................7-7
Table 7-5 Related operation for configuring the ATM traffic profile..................................................................7-9
Table 7-6 Related operation for configuring a service PVC for the E1 port......................................................7-11
Table 7-7 Related operation for configuring a service PVC for IMA upstream transmission...........................7-12
Table 7-8 Related operation for configuring the terminal management PVC....................................................7-14
Table 7-9 Related operation for enabling the CAR function of a PVC..............................................................7-15
Table 8-1 Related operation for configuring the aging time of a dynamic MAC address...................................8-4
Table 9-1 Related operation for enabling PITP....................................................................................................9-3
Table 9-2 Related operation for enabling the PITP option82 function................................................................9-4
Table 9-3 Related operation for configuring the encoding format of PITP.........................................................9-5
Table 9-4 Related operation for configuring the binding between a PVC and an IP address..............................9-6
Table 9-5 Related operation for configuring the binding between a PVC and a MAC address...........................9-7
Table 10-1 Related operation for setting the mapping between the CoS priority and the queue scheduling.....10-3
Table 11-1 Related operation for configuring an acceptable address segment..................................................11-3
Table 11-2 Related operation for configuring an unacceptable address segment..............................................11-3
Table 12-1 LAN boards supported by the MA5105...........................................................................................12-3
Table 12-2 Data plan for the configuring the LAN upstream service................................................................12-5
Table 12-3 Related operation for configuring the LAN port mode....................................................................12-9
Table 12-4 Related operation for configuring a service VLAN.......................................................................12-10
Table 12-5 Related operation for configuring the type of outer Ethernet frames............................................12-11
Table 12-6 Related operation for configuring the traffic suppression..............................................................12-13
Table 12-7 Related operation for configuring the logic loopback....................................................................12-14
Table 12-8 Related operation for configuring the PHY loopback....................................................................12-15
Table 12-9 Related operation for configuring the UTOPIA loopback.............................................................12-16
Table 12-10 Related operation for disabling the LAN port..............................................................................12-17
Table 12-11 Related operation for disabling the UTOPIA port.......................................................................12-18
Table 13-1 Data plan for configuring the IMA upstream transmission..............................................................13-5
Table 13-2 Related operation for adding an IMA group....................................................................................13-8
Table 13-3 Related operation for enabling the CRC4 function of an IMA group..............................................13-9
Table 13-4 Related operation for enabling the scramble function...................................................................13-10
Table 13-5 Related operation for adding an IMA link.....................................................................................13-11

x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide Tables

Table 13-6 Related operation for setting the auto reset function of an IMA group.........................................13-12
Table 13-7 Related operation for disabling the UTOPIA port.........................................................................13-14
Table 13-8 Related operation for configuring the LIU loopback.....................................................................13-16
Table 13-9 Related operation for configuring the logic loopback....................................................................13-17
Table 14-1 Data plan for the configuring the E1 upstream transmission...........................................................14-3
Table 14-2 Related operation for enabling the CRC4 function of the E1 port...................................................14-5
Table 14-3 Related operation for disabling the E1 port.....................................................................................14-6
Table 14-4 Related operation for disabling the UTOPIA port...........................................................................14-6
Table 14-5 Related operation for configuring the LIU loopback.......................................................................14-8
Table 14-6 Related operation for configuring the ETU loopback......................................................................14-9
Table 14-7 Related operation for configuring the logic loopback....................................................................14-10
Table 15-1 Data plan for configuring the ADSL2+ access service....................................................................15-4
Table 15-2 Parameters of an ADSL2+ line profile...........................................................................................15-10
Table 15-3 Related operation for adding an ADSL2+ line profile...................................................................15-11
Table 15-4 Parameters for adding an ADSL2+ alarm profile..........................................................................15-14
Table 15-5 Related operation for configuring an ADSL2+ alarm profile........................................................15-15
Table 15-6 Related operation for activating an ADSL2+ port.........................................................................15-17
Table 15-7 Related operation for binding an ADSL2+ alarm profile..............................................................15-18
Table 15-8 Related operation for blocking an ADSL2+ port...........................................................................15-19
Table 15-9 Rlated operation for resetting the ADSL2+ chipset.......................................................................15-20
Table 16-1 Data plan for configuring the SHDSL service.................................................................................16-4
Table 16-2 Parameters of an SHDSL line profile...............................................................................................16-9
Table 16-3 Related operation for adding an SHDSL line profile.....................................................................16-10
Table 16-4 Parameters of an SHDSL alarm profile.........................................................................................16-13
Table 16-5 Related operation for adding an SHDSL alarm profile..................................................................16-14
Table 16-6 Related operation for binding an SHDSL alarm profile................................................................16-16
Table 16-7 Related operation for activating an SHDSL port...........................................................................16-17
Table 16-8 Related operation for blocking an SHDSL port.............................................................................16-18
Table 16-9 Related operation for configuring the SHDSL port loopback........................................................16-20
Table 16-10 Related operation for resetting the SHDSL chipset.....................................................................16-21
Table 17-1 Data plan for configuring the IGMP snooping multicast service.....................................................17-3
Table 17-2 Related operation for configuring the multicast working mode......................................................17-7
Table 17-3 Related operation for configuring the multicast VPI/VCI...............................................................17-8
Table 17-4 Related operation for configuring the user leave delay....................................................................17-9
Table 17-5 Related operation for configuring the user query interval...............................................................17-9
Table 17-6 Related operation for enabling the information function of user login..........................................17-10
Table 17-7 Related operation for adding a multicast program.........................................................................17-11
Table 17-8 Related operation of configuring an authority profile....................................................................17-13
Table 17-9 Related operation of configuring an authority profile....................................................................17-14
Table 18-1 Related operation for configuring the OAM attribute......................................................................18-3
Table 18-2 Related operation for enabling the CC function...............................................................................18-4
Table 18-3 Related operation for inserting an OAM cell...................................................................................18-5

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Tables Configuration Guide

Table 18-4 Related operation for configuring the identification of the OAM loopback point...........................18-6
Table 18-5 Related operation for configuring the OAM cell loopback at the ATM side..................................18-7
Table 18-6 Related operation for configuring the OAM cell loopback at the xDSL side..................................18-8

xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
This document describes the configuration of various services supported by the MA5105. The
description covers the following topics:
l Purpose
l Networking
l Data plan
l Prerequisite(s)
l Precaution
l Configuration flowchart
l Configuration procedure
l Verification result
This document helps users to know the configuration of various services supported by the
MA5105.

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

MA5105 V100R010

N2000 BMS V200R0008

Intended Audience
The intended audience of this document is:

l Data configuration engineers


l System maintenance engineers
l Installation and commissioning engineers

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
About This Document Configuration Guide

Organization
This document describes the process of configuring the MA5105. Each chapter begins with an
overview, describes the configuration flowchart and the configuration example, and then details
the basic operation applied in this chapter. Some chapters do not involve the description of
configuration flowchart and configuration examples.

Experienced audience is recommended to begin with the configuration example. And learners
are recommended to begin with the basic operation.

Chapter... Describes...

1 Configuring the How to configure the maintenance terminal


Maintenance Terminal

2 CLI Operation Basics The CLI features of the MA5105 and how to operate the
MA5105 through CLI

3 Configuring the Inband The connection between the NMS and the MA5105 and the
NMS configuration process in the MA5105

4 Configuring a Log Host How to configure the log host

5 Managing the User The classification of users and how to add, modify, delete
and disconnect a user

6 Managing the Board The board management supported by the MA5105

7 Configuring a PVC The PVCs supported by the MA5105 and how to configure
a PVC

8 Managing the MAC How to manage MAC addresses


Address

9 Configuring User Security The user security supported by the MA5105 and the related
configuration

10 Configuring QoS The QoS supported by the MA5105 and the related
configuration

11 Configuring System The system security supported by the MA5105 and the
Security related configuration

12 Configuring the LAN The LAN upstream service supported by the MA5105 and
Upstream Service the related configuration

13 Configuring IMA The IMA upstream service supported by the MA5105 and
Upstream Transmission the related configuration

14 Configuring the E1 The E1 upstream service supported by the MA5105 and the
Upstream Service related configuration

15 Configuring the ADSL2+ The ADSL2+ technology and how to configure the ADSL2
Service + service on the MA5105

16 Configuring the SHDSL The SHDSL technology and how to configure the SHDSL
Service service on the MA5105.

2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide About This Document

Chapter... Describes...

17 Configuring the The multicast service supported by the MA5105 and the
Multicast Service related configuration

18 Configuring ATM OAM The basic concept of the ATM OAM, how to configure the
attributes of the OAM and how to insert an OAM cell

A Acronyms & The acronyms and abbreviations used in this document


Abbreviations

Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not


avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which,


if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not


avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, and
performance degradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save


your time.

Provides additional information to emphasize or


supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions
Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For
example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.


Courier New Terminal display is in Courier New.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
About This Document Configuration Guide

Command Conventions
Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italic.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are


optional.

{ x | y | ... } Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. One is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets


and separated by vertical bars. One or none is selected.

{ x | y | ... } * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all can
be selected.

[ x | y | ... ] * Alternative items are grouped in square brackets and


separated by vertical bars. Multiple or none can be
selected.

GUI Conventions
Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in
boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For
example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operation
Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1 + Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the
three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys
should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operation
Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.

4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide About This Document

Action Description

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without
moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain
position.

Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version
contains all updates made to previous versions.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12)
Based on issue 01 (2007-07-20), the document is updated as follows:
The following information is modified:
l 12.3 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service
l 12.5 Configuring a Service VLAN

Issue 01 (2007-07-20)
This is the first release.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal

1 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal

About This Chapter

Configuring the maintenance terminal involves the method and process for configuring the
maintenance terminal.

1.1 Overview of the Maintenance Terminal


The overview of the maintenance terminal involves the different methods of managing and
maintaining the MA5105 and the features of the methods.
1.2 Configuring the Terminal Through the Local Serial Port
This topicdescribes how to manage the MA5105 by logging in to the CLI system through the
HyperTerminal of the Windows OS.
1.3 Configuring the Terminal Through the Inband Management Channel in ATM Mode
This operation enables you to maintain the MA5105 through the inband management channel
in ATM mode.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
1 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal Configuration Guide

1.1 Overview of the Maintenance Terminal


The overview of the maintenance terminal involves the different methods of managing and
maintaining the MA5105 and the features of the methods.

The SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module (the MA5105 for short) supports the
command line interface (CLI)-based maintenance terminal. The maintenance terminal has the
following three configuration methods:

l 1.2 Configuring the Terminal Through the Local Serial Port


l 1.3 Configuring the Terminal Through the Inband Management Channel in ATM
Mode
l 1.4 Configuring the Terminal Through the Inband Management Channel in LAN
Mode

Table 1-1 lists the features of the methods of configuring the maintenance terminal.

Table 1-1 Features of the methods of configuring the maintenance terminal

Maintenance Description Feature


Mode

Local serial port Uses the HyperTerminal No network management software is required.
of the operating system User interface is provided by the software
(OS) for local embedded in the OS or by simple commercial
configuration. software.

Inband Completes the l No specific maintenance interface is


management networking for required. The remote maintenance terminal
channel managing network manages the MA5105 through the upstream
devices through the interface.
service channel provided l Advantage: It adopts flexible networking,
by the MA5105. without requiring extra networking devices,
thus saving user cost.
l Disadvantage: The maintenance work
cannot be carried out if the service channel
fails.

1.2 Configuring the Terminal Through the Local Serial Port


This topicdescribes how to manage the MA5105 by logging in to the CLI system through the
HyperTerminal of the Windows OS.

Networking

Flowchart
Figure 1-1 shows the networking for configuring the maintenance terminal through the local
serial port.

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal

Figure 1-1 Networking for configuring the maintenance terminal through the local serial port

Service board 1
CON
Service board 2

MA5105
Serial port

PC

Figure 1-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the maintenance terminal through the local serial
port.

Figure 1-2 Flowchart for configuring the maintenance terminal through the local serial port

Start

Connect the serial port


cable

Run the HyperTerminal

Set the parameters of the


terminal

Log in to the system

End

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the serial port cable.

Connect the serial port of a PC to the maintenance serial port of the MA5105 control board by
using the standard RS-232 cable, as shown in Figure 1-1.

Step 2 Run the HyperTerminal.


1. Set up a connection.

On a computer, choose Start > Programs > Accessories > Communication >
HyperTerminal to display the Connection Description dialog box. Enter the connection
name, as shown in Figure 1-3. Click OK.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
1 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal Configuration Guide

Figure 1-3 Setting up a connection

2. Configure the serial port.

Select the standard character terminal or PC terminal serial port that is actually connected
to the MA5105. Assume it to be COM1, as shown in Figure 1-4. Click OK.

Figure 1-4 Selecting the serial port to be connected

Step 3 Set the parameters of the terminal.

Set the parameters in the COM1 Properties dialog box as shown in Figure 1-5. In this example,
the values are set as follows:

1-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal

l Baud rate: 9600 bit/s


l Data bits: 8
l Parity: None
l Stop bits: 1
l Flow control: None
NOTE

l When setting the baud rate, make sure that the baud rate of the HyperTerminal is consistent with that
of the serial port in the system. By default, the baud rate of the serial port is 9600 bit/s.
l There may be illegible characters in the entered information after you log in to the system. This is
usually due to baud rate inconsistency between the HyperTerminal and the system. In this case, use a
different baud rate to log in to the system. The system supports the baud rates of 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/
s, 38400 bit/s, 57600 bit/s and 115200 bit/s.

Figure 1-5 Setting parameters of the HyperTerminal

Click OK, and then the HyperTerminal interface is displayed, as shown in Figure 1-6.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
1 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal Configuration Guide

Figure 1-6 HyperTerminal interface

Step 4 Set the terminal emulation type.


In the HyperTerminal interface, choose File > Properties. Click the Settings tab and set the
Terminal Emulation type as VT100 or Auto Detection, as shown in Figure 1-7.

1-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal

Figure 1-7 Setting the terminal emulation type

Step 5 Set the line delay and character delay.


Click ASCII Setup, and set both the line delay and character delay as 200 ms for ASCII sending,
as shown in Figure 1-8.

NOTE

When you paste text in the HyperTerminal, the character delay controls the character transmit speed. The
line delay controls the interval of sending every line. Too short delay may cause characters lost. When the
pasted texts are displayed abnormally, you can modify the setting.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
1 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal Configuration Guide

Figure 1-8 Setting the ASCII code

----End

Result
Press Enter in the HyperTerminal interface. Then, the system displays a prompt to require the
user name. Enter the user name and password in the prompt box for registration. Then wait until
the command line prompt (such as MA5105>) is displayed. By default, the name of the super
user is root and the password is admin.

If the login fails, click the icon and then click the icon. If you still fail to log in, check
and ensure that the parameter settings and physical connections are correct, and then log in to
the system again.

1.3 Configuring the Terminal Through the Inband


Management Channel in ATM Mode
This operation enables you to maintain the MA5105 through the inband management channel
in ATM mode.

Service Specifications

Networking

Data Plan

Flowchart

1-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal

Two users can log in to the MA5105 at the remote side through the inband network management
system (NMS) to maintain the system and perform related operations.
Figure 1-9 shows the networking for maintenance through the inband management channel in
ATM mode.

Figure 1-9 Networking for maintenance through the inband management channel in ATM mode

Start

Set uplink port parameters

Set the IP addoress of the


inband interface

Set a route

Set the ACL

Set the inband NMS PVC

Log in to the system

End

Table 1-2 lists the data plan for maintenance through the inband management channel in ATM
mode.

Table 1-2 Data plan for maintenance through the inband management channel in ATM mode
Item Data

Inband management channel of IP address: 10.11.120.1


the MA5105 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.192

ATM port parameters Slot: 0/0/1


VPI/VCI: 0/100

Maintenance terminal IP address: 10.11.104.100


Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
1 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal Configuration Guide

Item Data

Port of the router connecting to the IP address: 10.11.120.62


MA5100 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.192

Port of the router connecting to the IP address: 10.11.104.12


maintenance terminal Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

NOTE

l The IP address segment of the NMS computer and that of the system route must be in the list of accessible
IP addresses. Otherwise, the inband NMS cannot be implemented.
l If the inband NMS is configured successfully, you can successfully ping the IP address of the router from
the command line terminal of the MA5105.

Figure 1-10 shows the flowchart for maintenance through the inband management channel in
ATM mode.

Figure 1-10 Flowchart for maintenance through the inband management channel in ATM mode

iManager N2000

MA5100 Router

MA5105

DSL users
DSL users

Procedure
Step 1 Set uplink port parameters.
Set the uplink port parameters according to the settings of the peer port. If the services travel
upstream through the MIEA board, you need to set the CRC4 function. If the services travel
upstream through the MIMA board, you need to set such parameters as clock mode, CRC4
function, and the scramble function.
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#crc4
<portid>{1-4}:0
Enable CRC4 successfully.

Step 2 Set the device IP address.


huawei(config)#atmlan ip-address atm
<ip-addr>:1.1.1.1

1-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal

<netmask>:255.255.255.0
Set successfully.

CAUTION
If a route exists in the system, delete it first. Otherwise, the gateway of the route may conflict
with the device IP address. For example, they are not in a same network segment. This causes
configuration failure.

Step 3 Add an inband NMS route.


The route information includes: IP address, subnet mask and gateway. The IP address can be
that of the NMS computer. It can also be an IP address in a network segment. In general, it is
set to 0.0.0.0, namely, the destination IP address can be an arbitrary one.
huawei(config)#atmlan ip-route
<ip-addr>:0.0.0.0
<netmask>:0.0.0.0
<gateway>:10.11.120.62
Add route successfully.

The IP address of the gateway must be that of the upper layer device (router).
Step 4 Set the list of accessible addresses.
huawei(config)#atmlan ip-access
<start-ip>:10.11.120.1
<end-ip>:10.11.120.254
<mask>:255.255.255.0
Add acceptable IP address successfully.

huawei(config)#atmlan ip-access
<start-ip>:10.11.104.1
<end-ip>:10.11.104.254
<mask>:255.255.255.0
Add acceptable IP address successfully.

Step 5 Set the PVC of the inband NMS.


When you maintain the device through the inband management channel in ATM mode, the
encapsulation protocol of the PVC must be IPoA or 1483B according to the feature of the upper
layer interface. This example selects the IPoA. (The router terminates the IPoA.)
huawei(config)#pvc
{adsl,atm,nms}:atm
<FrameId/SlotId/PortId>(0)/(0)/(1-4)}:0/0/1
{<vpi>}{0-15}:0
{<vci>}{0-511}:100
{adsl,atm,nms}:nms
{ipoa,1483b}:ipoa
<ip>:1.1.1.254
<rx-cttr>{1-2}:1
<tx-cttr>{1-2}:1
add pvc successfully, CID = 1.

Step 6 Log in to the system.


On the maintenance terminal, choose Start > Run. In the Open text box, enter the IP address
of the inband interface of the MA5105. Click OK to run the Telnet program. This section takes
Windows XP as an example.
Step 7 Save the data.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
1 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal Configuration Guide

huawei(config)#save

----End

Result
Users log in. In this case, the system gives the following prompt: By default, the name of the
super user is root and the password is admin.
Huawei MA5105 Multi-service Access Module.
Copyright(C) 1998-2007 by Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Current time is Wed 15:16:48, 2007/04/05.
> User name (<20 chars):

1.4 Configuring the Terminal Through the Inband


Management Channel in LAN Mode
This operation enables you to maintain the MA5105 through the local area network (LAN)
interface from the maintenance terminal.

Service Specifications

Networking

Data Plan

Flowchart

Two users can log in to the MA5105 at the remote side through the inband network management
system (NMS) to maintain the system and perform related operations.

Figure 1-11 shows the networking for configuring the inband management channel in LAN
mode.

Figure 1-11 Networking for configuring the inband management channel in LAN mode

iManager N2000

MA5100 Router

MA5105

DSL users
DSL users

1-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal

Table 1-3 lists the data plan for configuring the inband management channel in LAN mode.

Table 1-3 Data plan for configuring the inband management channel in LAN mode
Item Data

MA5105 FE port mode: tagged

Inband VLAN: 1

IP address of the inband interface: 1.1.1.1. Subnet mask:


255.255.255.0

Router IP address of the MA5100: 1.1.1.254. Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

PC2 IP address: 202.103.224.1. Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Figure 1-12 shows the flowchart for configuring the inband management channel in LAN mode.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
1 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal Configuration Guide

Figure 1-12 Flowchart for configuring the inband management channel in LAN mode

Start

Set up the configuration


environment

Configure the inband NMS


VLAN

Set the IP address of the


inband interface

Configure the route

Configure the ACL

Add an NMW

Run the Telnet program

Log in to the system

End

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the inband NMS VLAN.
huawei(config)#nms tagged 1
Are you sure to set the inband VLAN to 1? (y/n) [n]:y
Set inband VLAN successfully.

Step 2 Set the IP address of the inband interface.


huawei(config)#atmlan ip-address ethernet 10.11.80.1 255.255.255.0
Set successfully.

1-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 1 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal

Step 3 Configure the route.


huawei(config)#atmlan ip-route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.11.80.51
Add route successfully.

Step 4 Configure the access control list (ACL).


huawei(config)#atmlan ip-access 10.11.106.5 10.11.106.10 255.255.255.0
Add acceptable IP address successfully.
huawei(config)#atmlan ip-access 10.11.80.1 10.11.80.254 255.255.255.0
Add acceptable IP address successfully.

Step 5 Add a network management workstation (NMW).


For details, see "3.4 Configuring the NMW."
Step 6 Log in to the system.
On the maintenance terminal, choose Start > Run. In the Open text box, enter the IP address
of the inband interface of the MA5105. Click OK to run the Telnet program. This section takes
Windows XP as an example.
Step 7 Save the data.
huawei(config)#save

----End

Result
Users log in. In this case, the system gives the following prompt: By default, the name of the
super user is root and the password is admin.
Huawei MA5105 Multi-service Access Module.
Copyright(C) 1998-2007 by Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Current time is Wed 15:16:48, 2007/04/05.
> User name (<20 chars):

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 2 CLI Operation Basics

2 CLI Operation Basics

About This Chapter

The CLI operation basics describe the CLI operation features of the MA5105 and the basic
operations on the MA5105 through the command line interface (CLI).

2.1 Overview of CLI


The overview of CLI describes two maintenance modes (NMS and CLI) of the MA5105 and
the features of the maintenance modes.
2.2 CLI Features
The features of the MA5105 CLI mode provides an overview of command modes and describes
intelligent matching, edit function, smart input, display function, saving history commands, and
command line error prompts.
2.3 Basic Operations Through CLI
Basic operations describe the operations used to maintain and manage the MA5105 through the
CLI.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
2 CLI Operation Basics Configuration Guide

2.1 Overview of CLI


The overview of CLI describes two maintenance modes (NMS and CLI) of the MA5105 and
the features of the maintenance modes.

Service Description
The MA5105 is maintained in CLI mode.
The command line mode provides the maintenance interface for users through CLI.

Service Specifications
This topic describes some basic CLI operations. After reading this chapter, you can perform the
most common operations for configuring the MA5105 through the CLI.

2.2 CLI Features


The features of the MA5105 CLI mode provides an overview of command modes and describes
intelligent matching, edit function, smart input, display function, saving history commands, and
command line error prompts.
2.2.1 Overview of Command Modes
The overview of command modes involves the classification and features of the CLI mode, and
the conversion between command modes.
2.2.2 Intelligent Matching
The intelligent matching means that if you enter an incomplete keyword and press the space bar,
the system automatically displays the matching result.
2.2.3 Edit Function
The edit function provides the keys that can be used to enter keywords and parameters in the
CLI.
2.2.4 Smart Input
Smart input means that after you enter an incomplete command and press Enter, the CLI system
prompts the next command key word and its parameter type.
2.2.5 Display Function
The CLI system can suspend the information display when too much information is displayed.
2.2.6 Saving History Commands
The CLI system automatically saves the history commands you entered. You can query the
history commands saved by the CLI, and run the commands again.
2.2.7 Command Line Error Prompts
When the commands that you entered are incorrect and fail to be run, the CLI system reports an
error prompt to you.

2.2.1 Overview of Command Modes


The overview of command modes involves the classification and features of the CLI mode, and
the conversion between command modes.

2-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 2 CLI Operation Basics

Command Mode Classification


The MA5105 supports multiple command modes to implement the hierarchical protection and
to prevent unauthorized users from using the system.
The MA5105 supports the following command modes:
l User mode
l Privilege mode
l Global config mode
l ATM mode
l ADSL mode
l LAN mode
l SHDSL mode

Command Mode Features


l Downward compatibility
All commands that work in user mode are available in privilege mode. The commands that
work in user mode and privilege mode are all available in global config mode.
l Hierarchical protection
Hierarchical protection prevents the invasion of unauthorized users. Users of different
levels can enter different command modes. Even if users of different levels enter the same
command mode, the executable commands vary.

Command Mode Switching


Figure 2-1 shows how to switch the command modes.

Figure 2-1 Command mode switching

interface adsl ADSL mode


exit huawei(config-ADSL-0/1)#

SHDSL mode
interface shdsl huawei(config-SHDSL-0/1)#
exit
configure
exit User enable Privilege terminal Global config mode
mode mode
exit exit/end huawei(config)#
huawei> huawei#

interface lan LAN mode


exit huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#

interface atm ATM mode


exit huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#

end

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
2 CLI Operation Basics Configuration Guide

Table 2-1 shows the functions of each interface or port configuration mode.

Table 2-1 Functions of each interface or port configuration mode


Comma To... Prompt Entry
nd
Mode

ADSL Set the huawei(config-ADSL-0/1)# huawei(config)#interface adsl


mode ADSL port
parameters

ATM Set the huawei(config-ATM-0/0)# huawei(config)#interface atm


mode ATM port
parameters

SHDSL Set the huawei(config-SHDSL-0/0)# huawei(config)#interface


mode SHDSL shdsl
parameters

LAN Set the huawei(config-LAN-0/0)# huawei(config)#interface lan


mode LAN port
parameters

NOTE

To exit from a command mode, run the exit command. To switch from the current mode to the privilege
mode, run the end command. To switch from the privilege mode to the user mode, run the disable
command. By default, the CLI prompt uses device name MA5105 as the prefix (Run the hostname
command to change the prefix). The bracketed words indicate the current configuration mode.

2.2.2 Intelligent Matching


The intelligent matching means that if you enter an incomplete keyword and press the space bar,
the system automatically displays the matching result.

Function Description
For ease of operation, the MA5105 supports the intelligent matching. Enter an incomplete
keyword, and then press the space bar, the MA5105 displays a list of matching keywords. For
example, for the command enable, enter en or ena (in user mode) and press the space bar.
If you cannot enter a space, it indicates that:
l A wrong command is entered. In this case, check the command and enter the correct one.

For example, if you enter the terminal user command incorrectly in privilege mode,
you cannot press the space bar.
l The entered keyword conflicts with others.

For example, enter se in global config mode, but no command is matched. It is because
that the commands search and serial mode both begin with the key word se.

2-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 2 CLI Operation Basics

2.2.3 Edit Function


The edit function provides the keys that can be used to enter keywords and parameters in the
CLI.

Function Description
The CLI provides basic edit functions for commands. It allows multi-line editing and up to 254
bytes for each command.

Specifications
Table 2-2 lists the edit functions.

Table 2-2 Edit functions


Key Function

Common keys If the edit buffer is not full, press the common key to
insert the entered character at the current cursor
position, and move the curser towards the right.

BackSpace Delete the character before the cursor, and move the
cursor forward. When reaching the beginning of the
command, the cursor stops.

Left arrow key ← or Ctrl+A Move the cursor to the left by one character.

Right arrow key → or Ctrl+D Move the cursor to the right by one character.

Up/down arrow keys ↑/↓ Display history commands. (For some display
terminals which do not support up/down arrow keys,
you can press Ctrl+P to select the last or next history
command.)

Ctrl+U Delete all the characters before the cursor and move the
cursor to the beginning of the line.

Ctrl+K Delete all the characters after the cursor and move the
cursor to the end of the line.

Ctrl+F Search the characters.

Ctrl+B Move the cursor to the end of the line.

ESC Exit from the current interface and disable the current
input by pressing the key twice.

NOTE

Common keys refer to the letter, numeric and punctuation keys.

2.2.4 Smart Input


Smart input means that after you enter an incomplete command and press Enter, the CLI system
prompts the next command key word and its parameter type.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
2 CLI Operation Basics Configuration Guide

Function
The MA5105 CLI system supports smart input. Namely, when you enter an incomplete
command, and then press Enter, the CLI system prompts the next command key word and its
parameter type. When you enter ?, the CLI system prompts the help information about this
command.

Example
To run the load program command in the CLI by using the smart input, do as follows:
huawei(config)#load program
{tftp,xmodem}:tftp
{<server-ip>}:10.10.10.1
<filename>[MTU_APP.EFS]:EFS
Are you sure to continue?(y/n)[y]:y

2.2.5 Display Function


The CLI system can suspend the information display when too much information is displayed.

Function Description
During the information display, sometimes the displayed information cannot be displayed on
one screen. In such situations, the system can pause the information display.

Specification
The MA5105 provides three choices, as listed in Table 2-3.

Table 2-3 Display functions

Key Function

Press Ctrl+C when the Stop the information display and terminate the execution
information display is paused. of commands.

Press Space when the information Continue to display the information on the next screen.
display is paused.

Press Enter when the information Continue to display the information about next line.
display is paused.

2.2.6 Saving History Commands


The CLI system automatically saves the history commands you entered. You can query the
history commands saved by the CLI, and run the commands again.

Context
l By default, the CLI saves up to 10 history commands for each user, and it can save 50
history commands in total.

2-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 2 CLI Operation Basics

l The queried history commands are valid only for the current user. After the user logs in
again, the history commands are cleared.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the history size command to set the number of the history commands saved in the command
buffer.

Step 2 Run the show history-size command to query the set number of history commands.

Step 3 Run the show history command to query history commands.

----End

Example
To set the number of history commands saved in the command buffer as 20 in privilege mode,
do as follows:
huawei#history size 20
huawei#show history-size
The max number of history command records: 20
huawei#show history
Command history list is
------------------------------
terminal language
history ?
terminal language
------------------------------
Record number: 3

2.2.7 Command Line Error Prompts


When the commands that you entered are incorrect and fail to be run, the CLI system reports an
error prompt to you.

Function Description
The commands you entered are executed if their syntax is correct. Otherwise, the system reports
an error prompt.

Specification
Table 2-4 lists the common error prompts for command lines.

Table 2-4 Common error prompts for command lines

Error Prompt Cause

Incorrect command l Such commands or keywords are not found.


l The parameter type is incorrect.
l The parameter value exceeds the threshold.

Invalid value The value range of the entered parameter is incorrect or invalid.

Invalid parameter The entered parameter is incorrect or invalid.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
2 CLI Operation Basics Configuration Guide

2.3 Basic Operations Through CLI


Basic operations describe the operations used to maintain and manage the MA5105 through the
CLI.

2.3.1 Obtaining Online Help Information


When you want to query the current command or the help information of the command in current
mode, enter ? after the prompt character or the key word. If no matching information is found,
the help list is empty.
2.3.2 Enabling the Interactive Mode for Running Commands
If the interactive mode is enabled, enter a command and press Enter. The system displays
prompts in interactive mode to prevent misoperation.
2.3.3 Switching Terminal Language
The MA5105 supports two languages as the general language and the local language. You can
select a language for displaying output information based on your preference.
2.3.4 Setting the System Time
The system time format is hh:mm:ss yyyy-mm-dd, namely, hour:minute:second year-month-
date.
2.3.5 Configuring the System Name
Configuring the system name helps to distinguish the MA5105s.
2.3.6 Setting Timeout Exit Time
After the timeout exit time is set, if no information is entered on the terminal during the timeout
exit time, the terminal exits from the system automatically.
2.3.7 Clearing the Screen
When you need to highlight the input or output information, perform this operation. You can
clear the current screen and the system displays the prompt on the upper left part of the screen.
2.3.8 Querying the Version Information
You can query the version information about the software running in the system or on a board.
2.3.9 Querying the History Command
When you need to query the history commands that you ran, perform this operation. After this
operation, the system displays all the entered commands (including the wrong commands).
2.3.10 Querying the Board CPU Utilization
By querying the board CPU utilization, you can check whether the board CPU utilization exceeds
the threshold. When the board CPU utilization exceeds the threshold, the system generates an
alarm. Therefore, you should pay attention to the CPU utilization.
2.3.11 Configuring the Help Mode
After the help mode switch is enabled, if you enter ?, the input of the previous line is displayed
again in the next command line.
2.3.12 Searching for a Command
The system allows a user to search for all the commands that contain a keyword within the
authority of the user. If a user does not enter a keyword and directly presses Enter, the system
displays all the commands that available within the authority range of the user.
2.3.13 Configuring the Number of Lines Displayed on One Screen

2-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 2 CLI Operation Basics

With this operation, you can configure the maximum number of lines displayed on one screen
at a time according to your preferences.
2.3.14 Configuring the Telnet Authority of a User
Only the super user can change the telnet login authority of users. When the telnet login authority
of a user is canceled, the user can access the device through the serial port only.
2.3.15 Saving System Data
When you need to decompress system data and save it to the flash memory, perform the operation
of saving system data. After restarting, the system loads the system data from the flash memory
and configures the hardware and the software in the system based on the data to let the system
works in the normal state.
2.3.16 Testing Network Status
To test the network status, you need to check the network connectivity and whether the host is
reachable, to check all gateways passed by data packets sent from a host to the destination, and
locate network faults.

2.3.1 Obtaining Online Help Information


When you want to query the current command or the help information of the command in current
mode, enter ? after the prompt character or the key word. If no matching information is found,
the help list is empty.

Context
The system offers two ways for obtaining online help:
l Full help

When you enter ? following the prompt, you can obtain help information about the
current available commands.
When you enter ? following a complete keyword, you can obtain help information about
all commands matching the keyword and the parameters used by the commands.
l Partial help

When you enter ? following an incomplete keyword, you can obtain help information
about the commands matching the incomplete keyword.

Example
To display the help information about all available commands in user mode, do as follows:
huawei>?
-----------------------------------------------
Mode [System Mode]
-----------------------------------------------

cls Clear screen


[no]command[1] <Group>Commands of command management
[no]exec-timeout Permit/Forbid to timeout and logout
help Description of the interactive help system
[no]help-mode Enable/Disable help mode operation
[no]length Set lines number each screen show
[no]monitor Open/Close the switch of debug information output
ping Send echo messages to test networks reachable
search Search command content the word user input
show[11] <Group>Commands of show system information
[no]smart Enable/Disable interactive operation

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
2 CLI Operation Basics Configuration Guide

terminal[1] <Group>Commands of terminal management


tracert Trace route to destination
-----------------------------------------------
Mode [User Mode]
-----------------------------------------------

enable Enter privileged EXEC mode

--More(Enter: next line, spacebar: next page, any other key: quit)--

Related Operation
Table 2-5 lists the related operation for obtaining online help information.

Table 2-5 Related operation for obtaining online help information

To... Run the Command...

Obtain system help information ?

2.3.2 Enabling the Interactive Mode for Running Commands


If the interactive mode is enabled, enter a command and press Enter. The system displays
prompts in interactive mode to prevent misoperation.

Context
For example, when you run the reboot command, the system displays the following information:
Please check whether data has saved, the unsaved data may lose if reboot active
board, are you sure to reboot active board? (y/n)[n]:

When the interactive mode is disabled, if you enter a command and press Enter, the system runs
the command directly. By default, the interactive mode is enabled.

Example
To enable the interactive mode, do as follows:
huawei>smart
Interactive function is already enabled
huawei#config
{ terminal<K>}:terminal
huawei(config)#

Related Operation
Table 2-6 lists related operation for enabling the interactive mode.

Table 2-6 Related operation for enabling the interactive mode

To... Run the Command...

Disable the interactive mode no smart

2-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 2 CLI Operation Basics

2.3.3 Switching Terminal Language


The MA5105 supports two languages as the general language and the local language. You can
select a language for displaying output information based on your preference.

Context
Currently, the MA5105 supports English and Chinese. English is the default language.

Procedure
Run the terminal language command to switch to the other language.

----End

Example
To run the terminal language command to switch to another language, do as follows:
huawei(config)#terminal language
English mode.

2.3.4 Setting the System Time


The system time format is hh:mm:ss yyyy-mm-dd, namely, hour:minute:second year-month-
date.

Context
l The system time takes effect immediately after the configuration.
l During the system time setting, the system checks the time for its validity. Illegal settings
are prohibited. Exercise caution when setting the leap year and leap month.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the time command to set the system time.

Step 2 Run the show time command to query the system time.

----End

Example
To set the current system time, do as follows:
huawei#time 17:56:08 2007/03/15
Set successfully.
huawei#show time
Current time: 17:56:08 UTC Thu 2007/03/15

2.3.5 Configuring the System Name


Configuring the system name helps to distinguish the MA5105s.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
2 CLI Operation Basics Configuration Guide

Context
l By default, the system name is MA5105.
l The system name takes effect immediately after the configuration.
l The system name modification affects the command line prompts.

Procedure
Run the hostname command to configure the system name.
----End

Example
To name the MA5105 as huawei_A, do as follows:
huawei(config)#hostname huawei_A
>Are you sure to modify system name?(y/n) [n]:y
Set successfully.
huawei_A(config)#

2.3.6 Setting Timeout Exit Time


After the timeout exit time is set, if no information is entered on the terminal during the timeout
exit time, the terminal exits from the system automatically.

Context
By default, the system forces users to exit from the system if no information is entered on this
terminal in five minutes.

Procedure
Run the exec-timeout command to set the timeout exit time.
----End

Example
To set the timeout exit time as five minutes, do as follows:
huawei>exec-timeout 5
Serial console will auto logout when timeout.

Related Operation
Table 2-7 lists the related operation for setting the timeout exit time. Run the no exec-
timeout command only when you log in through the serial port.

Table 2-7 Related operation for setting the timeout exit time

To... Run the Command...

Disable the terminal timeout exit no exec-timeout


function

2-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 2 CLI Operation Basics

2.3.7 Clearing the Screen


When you need to highlight the input or output information, perform this operation. You can
clear the current screen and the system displays the prompt on the upper left part of the screen.

Context
Running the cls command clears the screen but cannot clear the screen buffer.

Procedure
Run the cls command to clear the screen.

----End

Example
To clear the screen, do as follows:
huawei>cls

2.3.8 Querying the Version Information


You can query the version information about the software running in the system or on a board.

Context
By running the command, you can obtain the information about the version of the board that
works in the normal state only. The version of a faulty board cannot be obtained by running the
command.

Procedure
Run the show version to query the version information.

----End

Example
To query the version information about the board residing in slot 0/1, do as follows:
huawei#show version
[<frameId/slotId>]{(0)[/(0-2)]}:0/1
FrameId:0 slotId: 1
ADSL Board:
Pcb Version: H523ADCE VER.C
Mab Version: 0000
Logic Version: (U31)001

To query the version information about the board residing in slot 0/7, do as follows:

2.3.9 Querying the History Command


When you need to query the history commands that you ran, perform this operation. After this
operation, the system displays all the entered commands (including the wrong commands).

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
2 CLI Operation Basics Configuration Guide

Context
The history commands are valid for the current login user. After your re-login, these commands
are cleared.

You can run the history size command to set the number of the recorded commands. The range
is 0-50. By default, the system records the latest 10 commands.

Procedure
Run the show history command to query the history command.

----End

Example
To query history commands, do as follows:
huawei>show history
Command history list is
------------------------------
show history
disable
show time
show alarm history all 2
show his
display
show version
enable
alarm
show alarm list all
------------------------------
Record number: 10

2.3.10 Querying the Board CPU Utilization


By querying the board CPU utilization, you can check whether the board CPU utilization exceeds
the threshold. When the board CPU utilization exceeds the threshold, the system generates an
alarm. Therefore, you should pay attention to the CPU utilization.

Procedure
Run the show cpu command to query the board CPU utilization.

----End

Example
To query the CPU utilization of the board residing in 0/0, do as follows:
huawei>show cpu 0/0
Frame 0 Slot 0 Board CPU occupancy rate: 12%

2.3.11 Configuring the Help Mode


After the help mode switch is enabled, if you enter ?, the input of the previous line is displayed
again in the next command line.

2-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 2 CLI Operation Basics

Context
By default, the help mode switch is enabled.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the configure terminal command to enter the global config mode.
Step 2 Run the help-mode command to enable the help mode switch.

----End

Example
To enable the help mode switch, do as follows:
huawei(config)#help-mode
Help mode function is already enabled.

Related Operation
Table 2-8 lists the related operation for enabling the help mode switch.

Table 2-8 Related operation for enabling the help mode switch
To... Run the Command...

Disable the help mode switch no help-mode

2.3.12 Searching for a Command


The system allows a user to search for all the commands that contain a keyword within the
authority of the user. If a user does not enter a keyword and directly presses Enter, the system
displays all the commands that available within the authority range of the user.

Context
You can search for commands by a keyword in any mode.

Procedure
Run the search command to search for a command.
----End

Example
To search for the commands that contain keyword "help", do as follows:
huawei>search help
-----------------------------------------------
Mode [System Mode]
-----------------------------------------------
help
[no] help-mode

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
2 CLI Operation Basics Configuration Guide

-----------------------------------------------

Commands: 2

2.3.13 Configuring the Number of Lines Displayed on One Screen


With this operation, you can configure the maximum number of lines displayed on one screen
at a time according to your preferences.

Context
By default, 24 lines can be displayed on one screen in the system. Up to 100 lines can be displayed
at a time.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the length command to configure the number of lines displayed on one screen.
Step 2 Run the show length command to query the number of lines displayed on one screen.

----End

Example
To configure the number of lines displayed on one screen as 20, do as follows:
huawei>length 20
huawei>show length
The number of lines each screen show: 20

Related Operation
Table 2-9 lists the related operation for configuring the number of lines displayed on one screen.

Table 2-9 Related operation for configuring the number of lines displayed on one screen
To... Run the Command...

Restore the number of lines displayed on no length


one screen to the default

Query the configured number of lines show length


displayed on one screen

2.3.14 Configuring the Telnet Authority of a User


Only the super user can change the telnet login authority of users. When the telnet login authority
of a user is canceled, the user can access the device through the serial port only.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the user modifyusernametelnet command to configure the telnet authority.
Step 2 Run the show user command to query the user information.

----End

2-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 2 CLI Operation Basics

Example
To modify the telnet authority of user AI, do as follows:
huawei#user modify Al
<option>{password,level,telnet}:telnet
> Telnet permit?{on|off}[on]:
Telnet right modified successfully.
huawei#show user all
All users of console:
User Name Access Level Log Status Telnet
------------------- --------------------- ------------ ---------
root Super administrator online on
Al General user online on
------------------- --------------------- ------------ ---------

Related Operation
Table 2-10 lists the related operation for configuring the telnet authority.

Table 2-10 Related operation for configuring the telnet authority


To... Run the Command...

Add a user user name

Modify the password of a user user password

Query the information about a user show user

2.3.15 Saving System Data


When you need to decompress system data and save it to the flash memory, perform the operation
of saving system data. After restarting, the system loads the system data from the flash memory
and configures the hardware and the software in the system based on the data to let the system
works in the normal state.

Context
l In the process of saving data, to ensure the integrity and consistency of the data, do not
perform any other operation. That is, the system refuses any other operation in the process
of saving data until the data is saved successfully.
l The system automatically saves logs and alarm information to the synchronous dynamic
random access memory (SDRAM).
l After the auto-save interval is set, the system automatically decompresses and saves system
data to the flash memory based on the auto-save interval.
l The auto-save interval ranges from 1 to 1440 minutes. The granularity is one minute.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the autosave command to set the auto-save interval.
Step 2 Run the show autosave command to query the information about the auto-save function.
Step 3 Run the save command to save system data to the flash memory.

----End

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
2 CLI Operation Basics Configuration Guide

Example
To set the auto-save interval as 60 minutes, do as follows:
huawei(config)#autosave 60
huawei(config)#show autosave
Autosave is Enable.
Time interval(m) : 60
Startup time in this interval : 18:48:24 2005/03/16
Last autosave time : NULL

To save system data to the flash memory, do as follows:


huawei(config)#save
System data have been changed.
Do you want to save data to FLASH?(y/n) [y]:y
This operation will take several minutes,please wait...
Saving data in progress 100%.
Save data to Flash successfully.

Related Operation
Table 2-11 lists the related operation for saving system data.

Table 2-11 Related operation for saving system data

To... Run the Command...

Query the information about the auto- show autosave


save function of the system

2.3.16 Testing Network Status


To test the network status, you need to check the network connectivity and whether the host is
reachable, to check all gateways passed by data packets sent from a host to the destination, and
locate network faults.

Context
The ping and tracert commands can be used to test the network status.
l ping

The ping command is used to check the network connectivity and the host reachability.
l tracert

The tracert command is used to test the gateways passed by data packets sent from a
host to the destination. It can also be used to check the connectivity of a network and
to locate faults in the network.
The tracert command is run as follows:

1. The host sends a packet with the Time to Live (TTL) of 1 to the destination.
2. The system returns an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet to indicate
the failure in sending the packet due to TTL timeout.
3. The host sends a packet with the TTL of 2.
4. The system also returns a packet indicating TTL timeout in the second hop.

2-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 2 CLI Operation Basics

This process continues in this way until the packet reaches its destination.
By doing so, the system records the source address of each ICMP TTL timeout message,
and provides a path along which an IP packet passes all the way to the destination.

Procedure
l Run the ping command to test the network status.
l Run the tracert command to test the network status.
----End

Example
To test the network status, run the ping command.
huawei#ping 10.11.10.1
[-c]:
[-t]:
[-s]:
Ping 10.11.104.1: 56 data bytes, press CTRL_C to break
Reply from 10.11.10.1: bytes=56 Sequence=0 ttl=255 time = 3 ms
Reply from 10.11.10.1: bytes=56 Sequence=1 ttl=255 time = 4 ms
Reply from 10.11.10.1: bytes=56 Sequence=2 ttl=255 time = 4 ms
Reply from 10.11.10.1: bytes=56 Sequence=3 ttl=255 time = 4 ms
Reply from 10.11.10.1: bytes=56 Sequence=4 ttl=255 time = 3 ms
Ping statistics for 10.11.10.1:
Sent packets : 5
Received packets : 5
Lost packets : 0(0.00%)
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 3ms, Maximum = 4ms, Average = 4ms

To test the network status, run the tracert command.


huawei#tracert 10.11.16.3
traceroute to 10.11.16.3 max hops 30 ,packet 40 bytes
press CTRL_C to break
1 253 ms 476 ms 508 ms 10.11.120.62
2 * * * Request timed out.
3 * * * Request timed out.
4 4 ms 4 ms 5 ms 10.11.106.133

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2-19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring the Inband NMS

3 Configuring the Inband NMS

About This Chapter

Configuring the inband NMS involves how to connect the MA5105 to the network management
workstation (NMW) and how to configure the MA5105.

3.1 Overview of the Network Management System


The overview of the network management system (NMS) involves the NMS maintenance mode
of the MA5105.
3.2 Related NMS Concepts
This related NMS concepts of the MA5105 include the SNMP, NMW, agent, community name,
and Trap packet.
3.3 Configuration Example of an Inband NMS in ATM Mode
When using the MIEA uplink board, the MA5105 functions as the ATM-DSLAM device to
provide various access services for users. By configuring the inband NMS in ATM mode, you
can maintain the device from the iManager N2000 NMW through the inband management
channel.
3.4 Configuration Example of an Inband NMS in LAN Mode
When using the MFCE/MFCS/MFCM uplink board, the MA5105 serves as an IP-DSLAM to
provide services for access users. By configuring the inband NMS in LAN mode, you can
maintain the MA5105 from the iManager N2000 NMW through the inband management
channel.
3.5 Configuring the SNMP Agent
Configuring the SNMP agent involves the operations of enabling the SNMP agent switch,
configuring the Trap packets allowed to transmit, configuring the administrator contact
information, and so on.
3.6 Configuring the IP Address of the Inband Interface
To configure the inband NMS, you need to configure the IP address of the inband interface.
After the IP address of the inband interface is configured, you can configure the device through
the inband NMS.
3.7 Configuring a System Route

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
3 Configuring the Inband NMS Configuration Guide

When the device needs to access a specified network, you need to configure a system route from
the device to the specified network. After the system route is configured, you can access the
network.
3.8 Configuring the Inband NMS PVC
After the inband NMS PVC is configured, you can maintain the device through the inband
management channel and the inband NMS PVC.
3.9 Configuring the Inband NMS VLAN
If you need to maintain the MA5105 through the inband NMS channel, you must configure the
inband NMS VLAN for the MA5105.

3-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring the Inband NMS

3.1 Overview of the Network Management System


The overview of the network management system (NMS) involves the NMS maintenance mode
of the MA5105.

Service Description
The MA5105 provides the NMS interface, and applies the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) to communicate with NMS. The MA5105 supports the Huawei iManager
N2000 BMS Network Management System, namely, the iManager N2000 BMS (N2000 BMS
for short).
The N2000 BMS manages and maintains the MA5105 through the NMS interface of the
MA5105. The MA5105 provides the state information for the N2000 BMS by sending the Trap
packets, thus reporting some emergencies.

This topic describes the network configuration performed on the MA5105 to realize normal
communication between the MA5105 and the N2000 BMS.

NOTE

To guarantee that the MA5105 communicates with the N2000 BMS in the normal state, configure data on
the N2000 BMS. For operation details, refer to the MA5105 Commissioning Guide.

3.2 Related NMS Concepts


This related NMS concepts of the MA5105 include the SNMP, NMW, agent, community name,
and Trap packet.

SNMP
The SNMP is a prevailing network management protocol in the computer network. The SNMP
defines how to transfer the management information between the network management
workstation (NMW) and an agent.
The SNMP guarantees the management message to be transmitted between any two nodes. In
this case, the network administrator can search information about any network node, modify the
information, locate faults, plan capacity, and create reports.
An NMW is a workstation on which the programs of an NMS server run.
The NMW sends GetRequest, GetNextRequest and SetRequest packets to the agent.
An agent is the management software running on a managed network device.
When receiving request packets from NMW, the agent reads or writes the management variables
based on the packet type, generates the response packets, and replies to NMW.
In addition, the agent sends the Trap packet to report any events, such as cold/hot start, faults
and fault recovery, to NMW.
SNMP V1 and V2C adopt the community name authentication. The MA5105 discards the SNMP
packets that do not conform to the community name recognized. An SNMP community is
identified by characters called community name.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
3 Configuring the Inband NMS Configuration Guide

The Trap packet refers to the unsolicited information sent from a managed device to NMW to
report some emergency events.

3.3 Configuration Example of an Inband NMS in ATM


Mode
When using the MIEA uplink board, the MA5105 functions as the ATM-DSLAM device to
provide various access services for users. By configuring the inband NMS in ATM mode, you
can maintain the device from the iManager N2000 NMW through the inband management
channel.

Networking

Flowchart
l On the MA5105, ATM-DSLAM services travel upstream through the MIEA or MIMA
board. After the configuration, you can maintain the device from the iManager N2000
NMW through the inband management channel.
l Pay attention to the following points when configuring the inband NMS in ATM mode:
– Before adding an acceptable IP address, run the show atmlan ip-access command to
query the list of acceptable IP addresses. If the IP address to be added already exists in
the system, adding the IP address fails.
– The list of acceptable IP addresses and that of unacceptable IP address can contain up
to 20 IP addresses respectively.
– Before adding an unacceptable IP address, run the show atmlan ip-refuse command
to query the list of unacceptable IP addresses. If the IP address to be added already exists
in the system, adding the IP address fails.
– When configuring the inband NMS, add the IP address of the NMS computer to the list
of accessible IP addresses and make sure that the IP address is not in the list of
unacceptable IP addresses. Otherwise, the system considers that the IP address is
insecure and discards it.
Figure 3-1 shows the networking for configuring the inband NMS in ATM mode.

3-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring the Inband NMS

Figure 3-1 Networking for configuring the inband NMS in ATM mode

iManager N2000

Router
MA5100

ADCE
MIEA ADCE
PC MA5105

MIEA

Table 3-1 lists the data plan for configuring the inband NMS in ATM mode.

Table 3-1 Data plan for configuring the inband NMS in ATM mode
Item Data

MA5105 MIEA connection port: 0


IP address of the inband interface: 1.1.1.12
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

MA5100 The CRC4 function is enabled on the CESC port.

Router IP address of the MA5100: 1.1.1.254


Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

PC2 IP address: 202.103.224.1


Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Figure 3-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the inband NMS in ATM mode.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
3 Configuring the Inband NMS Configuration Guide

Figure 3-2 Flowchart for configuring the inband NMS in ATM mode

Sart

Set uplink port parameters

Set the IP address of the


inband interface

Set a route

Set the ACL

Set the inband NMS PVC

Enable the SNMP agent

Enable SNMP Traps

Set the community name

End

Procedure
Step 1 Set uplink port parameters.

Set the uplink port parameters according to the settings of the peer port. If the services travel
upstream through the MIEA board, you need to set the CRC4 function. If the services travel
upstream through the MIMA board, you need to set such parameters as clock mode, CRC4
function, and the scramble function.
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#crc4
<portid>{1-4}:0
Enable CRC4 successfully.

Step 2 Set the device IP address.


huawei(config)#atmlan ip-address atm 1.1.1.12 255.255.255.0
Set successfully.

Step 3 Add the inband NMS route.

3-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring the Inband NMS

The route information includes: IP address, subnet mask and gateway. The IP address can be
that of the NMS computer. It can also be an IP address in a network segment. In general, it is
set to 0.0.0.0, namely, the destination IP address can be an arbitrary one.
huawei(config)#atmlan ip-route 202.103.224.0 255.255.255.0 1.1.1.254
Add successfully.

Step 4 Set the access control list (ACL).

Set accessible IP addresses.


huawei(config)#atmlan ip-access
<start-ip>:1.1.1.1
<end-ip>:1.1.1.254
<mask>:255.255.255.0
Add acceptable IP address successfully.
huawei(config)#atmlan ip-access
<start-ip>:202.103.224.1
<end-ip>:202.103.224.254
<mask>:255.255.255.0
Add acceptable IP address successfully.

Step 5 Set the inband NMS PVC.


huawei(config)#pvc
{adsl,atm,nms}:nms
{ipoa,1483b}:ipoa
<ip>:1.1.1.254
{adsl,atm,nms}:atm
<FrameId/SlotId/PortId>(0)/(0)/(1-1)}:0/0/1
{<vpi>}{0-15}:0
{<vci>}{0-511}:100
<rx-cttr>{1-2}:1
<tx-cttr>{1-2}:1
add pvc successfully, CID = 1.

Step 6 Add a network management workstation (NMW).


1. Enable the SNMP agent.
huawei(config)#snmp-server enable agent
<version>{v1,v2,v3,all}:v1
SNMPv1 is enabled.

2. Enable the SNMP Traps.


After the SNMP Traps is enabled, once an emergency occurs, the event is reported to the
EMS.
huawei(config)#snmp-server enable traps
Traps sending is already enabled

3. Set the system contact information (optional). In general, the content of the system contact
information is the ID of an administrator and the contact method of the administrator. By
default, the system contact information is "Huawei ShenZhen China".
huawei(config)#snmp-server contact
System contact information:Beijing CHINA
Set system contact information successfully.

4. Set the system location information (optional). By default, the system location information
is "ShenZhen China".
huawei(config)#snmp-server location
System location information: huawei shenzhen
Set system location information successfully.

5. Set the NMS community name.


Note:
l You can add up to eight SNMP communities.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
3 Configuring the Inband NMS Configuration Guide

l The NMS name is the unique ID of the NMS. The IP address and its name must be
planned in a centralized manner.
l The string of a community name is case sensitive. That is, if two strings have the same
characters but in different uppercase and lowercase, the system considers them as
different community names.
l In general, the number of the port for Trap packets is 162.
l For the purpose of security, it is recommended that you change the default community
name.
l After setting the community name on the device, change the community name on the
NMS synchronously to keep the two community names the same. Otherwise, NMS
requests fail.
huawei(config)#snmp-server community
<name>(S[19]):huawei
<ip>:10.11.105.73
<get-community>(S[19])[public]:public
<set-community>(S[19])[private]:private
<notify-community>(S[19])[notify]:notify
<trap port>{1-65535}[162]:162
<trap version>{v1,v2}:v1
Add community name successfully.

----End

Result
After the configuration is successful, you can manage the MA5105 through the iManager N2000.

3.4 Configuration Example of an Inband NMS in LAN Mode


When using the MFCE/MFCS/MFCM uplink board, the MA5105 serves as an IP-DSLAM to
provide services for access users. By configuring the inband NMS in LAN mode, you can
maintain the MA5105 from the iManager N2000 NMW through the inband management
channel.

Networking

Data Plan

Flowchart
Figure 3-3 shows a sample network for configuring the inband NMS in LAN mode.

3-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring the Inband NMS

Figure 3-3 Sample network for configuring the inband NMS in LAN mode

iManager N2000

Router
MA5100

ADCE
MFCE
ADCE

MA5105

Table 3-2 lists the data plan for configuring the inband NMS in LAN mode.

Table 3-2 Data plan for configuring the inband NMS in LAN mode
Item Data

Inband management interface of the MA5105 IP address: 10.10.80.10


Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Maintenance terminal IP address: 10.11.106.6


Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Upper layer device IP address: 10.11.80.51


Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Figure 3-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the inband NMS in LAN mode.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
3 Configuring the Inband NMS Configuration Guide

Figure 3-4 Flowchart for configuring the inband NMS in LAN mode

Start

Set the inband NMS


channel

Set the device IP address

Set a system route

Set the ACL

Add an NMW

Save the data

End

Procedure
Step 1 Run the nms command to set the inband NMS channel.
l The system supports one inband NMS VLAN. The VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4095. The
inband NMS VLAN ID separates from the service VLAN ID. They can be the same, but they
do not affect each other.
l After receiving data frames, the system checks the VLAN ID with the inband VLAN ID. If
they are the same and the destination MAC address of the data frames is the same as the port
MAC address, the system considers that the data frames are legal. The data frames that do
not meet the requirements are forwarded to the service channel.
huawei(config)#nms tagged 1
Are you sure to set the inband VLAN to 1? (y/n) [n]:y
Set inband VLAN successfully.

Step 2 Run the atmlan ip-address ethernet command to set the IP address of the MA5105.

The IP address of the MA5105 must be in the same subnet as that of the gateway IP address.
The IP addresses and masks must comply with the network requirements.
huawei(config)#atmlan ip-address ethernet
<ip-addr>:10.10.80.10

3-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring the Inband NMS

<netmask>:255.255.255.0
Set successfully.

Step 3 Run the atmlan ip-route command to set a sytem routing.


The route information includes IP address, subnet mask and gateway. The IP address can be that
of the NMS computer. It can also be an IP address in a network segment. In general, it is set to
0.0.0.0, namely, the destination IP address can be an arbitrary one.
huawei(config)#atmlan ip-route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.10.80.1

Step 4 Run the atmlan ip-access command to set an acceptable IP address.


huawei(config)#atmlan ip-access
<start-ip>:10.10.0.0
<end-ip>:11.0.0.0
<mask>:255.255.255.0

Step 5 Add a network management workstation (NMW).


1. Enable the SNMP agent.
huawei(config)#snmp-server enable agent
<version>{v1,v2,v3,all}:v1
SNMPv1 is enabled.

2. Enable the SNMP Traps.


After the SNMP Traps is enabled, once an emergency occurs, the event is reported to the
EMS.
huawei(config)#snmp-server enable traps
Traps sending is already enabled

3. Set the system contact information (optional). In general, the content of the system contact
information is the ID of an administrator and the contact method of the administrator. By
default, the system contact information is "Huawei ShenZhen China".
huawei(config)#snmp-server contact
System contact information:Beijing CHINA
Set system contact information successfully.

4. Set the system location information (optional). By default, the system location information
is "ShenZhen China".
huawei(config)#snmp-server location
System location information: huawei shenzhen
Set system location information successfully.

5. Set the NMS community name.


Note:
l You can add up to eight SNMP communities.
l The NMS name is the unique ID of the NMS. The IP address and its name must be
planned in a centralized manner.
l The string of a community name is case sensitive. That is, if two strings have the same
characters but in different uppercase and lowercase, the system considers them as
different community names.
l In general, the number of the port for Trap packets is 162.
l For the purpose of security, it is recommended that you change the default community
name.
l After setting the community name on the device, change the community name on the
NMS synchronously to keep the two community names the same. Otherwise, NMS
requests fail.
huawei(config)#snmp-server community
<name>(S[19]):huawei
<ip>:10.11.106.6

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
3 Configuring the Inband NMS Configuration Guide

<get-community>(S[19])[public]:public
<set-community>(S[19])[private]:private
<notify-community>(S[19])[notify]:notify
<trap port>{1-65535}[162]:162
<trap version>{v1,v2}:v1
Add community name successfully.

Step 6 Run the save command to save the data.

----End

Result
The N2000 BMS can manage the MA5105 in the normal state.

3.5 Configuring the SNMP Agent


Configuring the SNMP agent involves the operations of enabling the SNMP agent switch,
configuring the Trap packets allowed to transmit, configuring the administrator contact
information, and so on.
3.5.1 Enabling the SNMP Agent Switch
Before managing the MA5105 through the NMS, you need to enable the simple network
management protocol (SNMP) agent switch. Otherwise, the device does not process the request
packets sent by the NMS.
3.5.2 Configuring the Trap Packets Allowed to Transmit
A Trap packet refers to the unsolicited information sent from a managed device to the NMS to
report emergency events. After the Trap packets allowed to transmit are configured, the device
reports the corresponding information to the NMS when an emergent event such as a clod/hot
start, fault, recovery occurs.
3.5.3 Configuring the Administrator Contact Information
Configuring the administrator contact information involves configuring the administrator ID
and contact ways. The administrator contact information is case sensitive.
3.5.4 Configuring the Device Location Information
After the device location information is configured, you can query the device location
information when maintaining the device and networking. This facilitates device maintenance
and management.
3.5.5 Configuring the NMS Community Name
When the MA5105 (SNMP agent) and the NMS (SNMP Manager) establish a community, you
need to configure the NMS community name. By checking whether the configured community
name is the same as that configured on the NMS, the system decides whether to process NMS
requests.

3.5.1 Enabling the SNMP Agent Switch


Before managing the MA5105 through the NMS, you need to enable the simple network
management protocol (SNMP) agent switch. Otherwise, the device does not process the request
packets sent by the NMS.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the snmp-server enable agent command to enable the SNMP agent switch.

3-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring the Inband NMS

Step 2 Run theshow snmp status command to query the status of the SNMP agent.

----End

Example
To enable the SNMP agent switch, do as follows:
huawei(config)#snmp-server enable agent all
SNMP agent is already enabled.
huawei(config)#show snmp status
Current community status:
--------------------------------------
Enable SNMPv1
Enable SNMPv2
Ensable SNMPv3
Enable trap sending
0 SNMP packets input
0 Bad SNMP version errors
0 Unknown community name
0 Illegal operation for community name supplied
0 Encoding errors
0 Number of requested variables
0 Number of altered variables
0 Get-request PDUs
0 Get-next PDUs
0 Set-request PDUs
131 SNMP packets output
0 Too big errors (Maximum packet size 4096)
0 No such name errors
0 Bad values errors
0 General errors
0 Response PDUs
131 Trap PDUs
--------------------------------------

Related Operation
Table 3-3 lists the related operation for enable the SNMP agent switch.

Table 3-3 Related operation for enable the SNMP agent switch
To... Run the Command...

Query the status of the SNMP protocol show snmp status

3.5.2 Configuring the Trap Packets Allowed to Transmit


A Trap packet refers to the unsolicited information sent from a managed device to the NMS to
report emergency events. After the Trap packets allowed to transmit are configured, the device
reports the corresponding information to the NMS when an emergent event such as a clod/hot
start, fault, recovery occurs.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the snmp-server enable traps command to configure the Trap packets allowed to transmit.
Step 2 Run the show snmp status command to query the status of the SNMP agent.

----End

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
3 Configuring the Inband NMS Configuration Guide

Example
To enable the device to transmit Trap packets to the NMS, do as follows:
huawei(config)#snmp-server enable traps
Traps sending is already enabled.
huawei(config)#show snmp status
Current community status:
--------------------------------------
Enable SNMPv1
Enable SNMPv2
Enable SNMPv3
Enable trap sending
0 SNMP packets input
0 Bad SNMP version errors
0 Unknown community name
0 Illegal operation for community name supplied
0 Encoding errors
0 Number of requested variables
0 Number of altered variables
0 Get-request PDUs
0 Get-next PDUs
0 Set-request PDUs
131 SNMP packets output
0 Too big errors (Maximum packet size 4096)
0 No such name errors
0 Bad values errors
0 General errors
0 Response PDUs
131 Trap PDUs
--------------------------------------

Related Operation
Table 3-4 lists related operation for configuring the Trap packets to transmit.

Table 3-4 Related operation for configuring the Trap packets allowed to transmit

To... Run the Command...

Prohibit the device from no snmp-server enable traps


transmitting Trap packets

3.5.3 Configuring the Administrator Contact Information


Configuring the administrator contact information involves configuring the administrator ID
and contact ways. The administrator contact information is case sensitive.

Context
By default, the administrator contact information is "Huawei ShenZhen China".

Procedure
Step 1 Run the snmp-server contact command to configure the administrator contact information.

Step 2 Run the show snmp contact command to query the administrator contact information.

----End

3-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring the Inband NMS

Example
To configure the administrator contact information as "WORLD community", do as follows:
huawei(config)#snmp-server contact
System contact information: WORLD community
Set system contact information successfully.
huawei(config)#show snmp contact
The contact information for system: WORLD community

Related Operation
Table 3-5 lists the related operation for configuring the administrator contact information.

Table 3-5 Related operation for configuring the administrator contact information

To... Run the Command...

Restore the administrator ID to the no snmp-server contact


default value

3.5.4 Configuring the Device Location Information


After the device location information is configured, you can query the device location
information when maintaining the device and networking. This facilitates device maintenance
and management.

Context
By default, the system location information is "Shenzhen China".

Procedure
Step 1 Run the snmp-server location command to configure the device location information.

Step 2 Run the show snmp location command to query the configured location information.

----End

Example
To configure the device location information as "huawei shenzhen", do as follows:
huawei(config)#snmp-server location huawei shenzhen
Set system location information
successfully.
huawei(config)#show snmp location
The location of system: huawei shenzhen.

Related Operation
Table 3-6 lists the related operation for configuring the device location information.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
3 Configuring the Inband NMS Configuration Guide

Table 3-6 Related operation for configuring the device location information
To... Run the Command...

Restore the device location no snmp-server location


information to the default one

3.5.5 Configuring the NMS Community Name


When the MA5105 (SNMP agent) and the NMS (SNMP Manager) establish a community, you
need to configure the NMS community name. By checking whether the configured community
name is the same as that configured on the NMS, the system decides whether to process NMS
requests.

Context
The NMW requires the following three community names:
l get-community: It is read-only. The default value is public.
l set-community: It is read-write and has the authority to create and delete contents or files.
The default value is private.
l notify-community: The NMS uses this community name to identify the agent. When
sending Trap packets to the NMS, the agent must provide the correct notify-community;
otherwise, the NMS does not accept the packets. The default value is notify.
NOTE

l For the sake of security, it is recommended that you change the default community name.
l After configuring the community name on the device, change the community name on the NMS
synchronously to keep the two community names consistent. Otherwise, NMS requests fail.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the snmp-server community command to configure the NMS community name.
Step 2 Run the show snmp community command to query the configured NMS community name.

----End

Example
To configure the NMS community name, do as follows:
huawei(config)#snmp-server community huawei 10.11.105.73 public private notify 162
v1
Add community name successfully.
huawei(config)#show snmp community
Community list
is:

--------------------------------------
Nms name : huawei
Nms IP :
10.11.105.73
Get community :
public
Set community :
private

3-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring the Inband NMS

Notify community:
notify
Trap port :
162
Trap version :
SNMPv1

Nms name :
bms177
Nms IP :
10.71.60.177
Get community :
public
Set community :
private
Notify community:
notify
Trap port :
162
Trap version : SNMPv1

Record number: 3

Related Operation
Table 3-7 lists the related operation for configuring the NMS community name.

Table 3-7 Related operation for configuring the NMS community name

To... Run the Command...

Delete the NMS community name no snmp-server community

3.6 Configuring the IP Address of the Inband Interface


To configure the inband NMS, you need to configure the IP address of the inband interface.
After the IP address of the inband interface is configured, you can configure the device through
the inband NMS.

Context
l When the firewall changes, delete the address segments that are insecure. If you telnet to
the system through the inband NMS from a host, the IP address of the host must be within
the range of accessible IP addresses.
l The IP address of the host must be in the same network segment as the IP address of the
maintenance terminal or the gateway. The IP addresses and masks must comply with the
network requirements. If a sytem routing exists and the IP address of the routed gateway
is not in the same network segment as the device, the settings fail. Delete the route and then
set the IP address of the device.
l By default, the IP address of the ATM network is 10.11.80.1.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the atmlan ip-address atm command to set the IP address of the device. The IP address
and the mask must comply with the network requirements.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
3 Configuring the Inband NMS Configuration Guide

NOTE

To provide the upstream service through the LAN port, run the atmlan ip-address ethernet command to
set the IP address of the device. The IP address and the mask must comply with the network requirements.

Step 2 Run the show atmlan ip-address command to query system IP address.

----End

Example
To set the IP address of the inband interface (MIEA or MIMA board upstream) as 128.8.10.10
and set the subnet mask as 255.255.0.0, do as follows:
huawei(config)#atmlan ip-address atm
<IP address>:128.8.10.10
<mask>:255.255.0.0
Set successfully.

To set the IP address of the inband interface (FE board upstream) as 10.11.104.100 and set the
subnet mask as 255.255.255.0, do as follows:
huawei(config)#atmlan ip-address ethernet
<ip-addr>:10.11.104.100
<netmask>:255.255.255.0
Set successfully.

Related Operation
Table 3-8 lists the related operation for configuring the IP address of the inband interface.

Table 3-8 Related operation for configuring the IP address of the inband interface

To... Run the Command...

Query the system IP address show atmlan ip-address

3.7 Configuring a System Route


When the device needs to access a specified network, you need to configure a system route from
the device to the specified network. After the system route is configured, you can access the
network.

Context
l The system supports up to 16 routes. When a route is no longer in use, delete it to reduce
the load of the system.
l When receiving an IP packet, the system compares the source IP address with the items in
the firewall list. If the source IP address is unacceptable, the system directly discards the
IP packet. If the source IP address is accessible, the system compares the destination IP
address with that of the device, if the two IP addresses are consistent, the system accepts
the IP packet and processes it.
l When sending an IP packet, the system checks whether the destination IP address is in the
same network segment with the IP address of the device. If the two IP address are not in
the same network segment, the system checks the system routing table. The system
performs the operation of AND on the destination IP address and the subnet mask of a route

3-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring the Inband NMS

entry. If the result is consistent with the destination address of the route entry, the system
sends the packet to the related gateway for forwarding.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the atmlan ip-route command to configure a system route.

Step 2 Run the show atmlan ip-route command to query a system route.

----End

Example
To configure the system route terminated at IP address 10.11.90.1, do as follows:
huawei(config)#atmlan ip-route
<ip-addr>:10.11.90.1
<netmask>:255.255.255.255
<gateway>:10.11.80.2
Add route successfully.
huawei(config)#show atmlan ip-route
Destination Netmask GateWay
--------------- --------------- ---------------
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.11.80.2
10.11.90.1 255.255.255.255 10.11.80.2
10.11.90.0 255.255.255.0 10.11.80.2
-------------------------------------------------
Routes = 3

Related Operation
Table 3-9 lists the related operation for configuring a system route.

Table 3-9 Related operation for configuring a system route

To... Run the Command...

Query system route information show atmlan ip-route

3.8 Configuring the Inband NMS PVC


After the inband NMS PVC is configured, you can maintain the device through the inband
management channel and the inband NMS PVC.

Context
l When configuring the inband NMS PVC, select IPoA or 1483B for the protocol type. If
you select 1483B, you need to configure only the VPI/VCI of the ATM port. If you select
IPoA, you need to configure not only the VPI/VCI of the board that is for ATM upstream
transmission, but also the IP address of the port connecting the IPoA PVC on the peer
device.
l When configuring the PVC, you must specify the port type. The port type decides the type
and number of parameters. The command line is used to check only the validity of the
parameters. It does not check whether a connection can be set up between two ports. After
the PVC is successfully configured, the channel identifier (CID) of the PVC is displayed.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
3 Configuring the Inband NMS Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Run the pvc command to configure the inband NMS PVC.

Step 2 Run the show pvc command to query the inband NMS PVC.

----End

Example
To configure a PVC from port 1 of the ADCE board inserted in slot 1 to the FE uplink board,
and choose traffic profile 3 as the traffic profiles at both the transmit and receive ends, do as
follows:

The port mode is untagged.


huawei(config)#pvc
{adsl,shdsl,lan}:adsl
<FrameId/SlotId/PortId>{(0)/(1-2)/(1-16)}:0/1/1
{<vpi>}{0-127}:0
{<vci>}{32-127}:35
{adsl,shdsl,lan}:lan
<FrameId/SlotId>{(0)/(0-2)}:0/0
{untagged,tagged}:untagged
<rx-car>{on,off}:on
<tx-car>{on,off}:on
<rx-cttr>{1-20}:3
<tx-cttr>{1-20}:3
Add PVC successfully, CID = 1.

When the port mode is tagged, create a VLAN and then create the PVC.
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#vlan 18
Add VLAN successfully, VLANID = 18
huawei(config)#pvc
{adsl,shdsl,lan}:adsl
<FrameId/SlotId/PortId>{(0)/(1-2)/(1-16)}:0/1/1
{<vpi>}{0-127}:0
{<vci>}{32-127}:35
{adsl,shdsl,lan}:lan
<FrameId/SlotId>{(0)/(0)}:0/0
{untagged,tagged}:tagged
<vlanId>{1-4095}:18
{1483b}:1483b
<priority>{0-7}:3
<rx-car>{off,on}[on]:on
<tx-car>{off,on}[on]:on
<rx-cttr>{1-20}:3
<tx-cttr>{1-20}:3
Add PVC successfully, CID = 1.

Related Operation
Table 3-10 lists the related operation for configuring the inband NMS PVC.

Table 3-10 Related operation for configuring the inband NMS PVC

To... Run the Command...

Query the inband NMS PVC show pvc

Delete the inband NMS PVC no pvc

3-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 3 Configuring the Inband NMS

3.9 Configuring the Inband NMS VLAN


If you need to maintain the MA5105 through the inband NMS channel, you must configure the
inband NMS VLAN for the MA5105.

Context
The system supports only one inband NMS VLAN. After receiving data frames, the system
checks the VLAN ID with the inband VLAN ID. If they are the same and the destination MAC
address of the data frames are the same as the port MAC address, the system considers that the
data frames are legal. The data frames that do not meet the requirements are forwarded to the
service channel.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the nms command to configure the inband NMS VLAN.

Step 2 Run the show nms command to query the configured inband NMS VLAN.

----End

Example
To configure the ID of the inband NMS VLAN as 254, do as follows:
huawei(config)#nms
<vlanId>{1-4095}:254
Are you sure to set the inband VLAN to 254? (y/n) [n]:y
Set inband VLAN successfully.
huawei (config)#show nms
Inband VLAN is 254

Related Operation
Table 3-11 lists the related operation for configuring the inband NMS VLAN.

Table 3-11 Related operation for configuring the inband NMS VLAN

To... Run the Remarks


Command...

Query the show nms This command is used for querying the
information about following:
the configured l Unicast service count and multicast service
inband NMS count
VLAN
l VLAN attribute and inner VLAN IDs

Delete the no nms This command is used for delete the configured
information about inband NMS VLAN.
the configured
inband NMS
VLAN

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3-21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring a Log Host

4 Configuring a Log Host

About This Chapter

This topic describes how to configure the log host.


4.1 Overview of the Log Host
A large quantity of logs are generated in device running. However, the storage space of the
device is relatively limited. After configuring the log host (a UNIX platform or a Windows
platform), you can collect and store the device logs.
4.2 Configuration Example of a Log Host
After a log host is successfully configured, the logs of a user can be uploaded to the log host.
4.3 Adding a Log Host
After a log host is added, some important information of the device can be recorded on the log
host (also called log server) through the syslog mechanism.
4.4 Deleting a Log Host
When the IP address of a log host changes or is not used any more, you can delete the log host.
After the log host is deleted, the system does not report log information to the log host.
4.5 Activating a Log Host
After adding a log host, you need to activate the log host, because the system sends log
information only to the activated log host.
4.6 Deactivating a Log Host
Before modifying or deleting the configuration of a log host, you need to deactivate the log host.
After the log host is deactivated, the system cannot report log information to the log host.
4.7 Querying Logs
When you query the logs recorded on a log host, you can query the IP addresses, names, and
statuses of all configured log hosts.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
4 Configuring a Log Host Configuration Guide

4.1 Overview of the Log Host


A large quantity of logs are generated in device running. However, the storage space of the
device is relatively limited. After configuring the log host (a UNIX platform or a Windows
platform), you can collect and store the device logs.

Function
Logs provide critical information that you can refer to when you maintain the MA5105 and
locating faults.
On the MA5105, you can query history commands through the logs and record important
information in the logs.

4.2 Configuration Example of a Log Host


After a log host is successfully configured, the logs of a user can be uploaded to the log host.

Prerequisite
l The inband NMS is configured, and you can telnet to the MA5105 through PC1 and PC2
for managing and configuring the device.
l PC3 is configured with the FTP or TFTP software. You can receive and save the log files
reported by the MA5105 through PC3.

Networking

Data Plan
PC1, PC2 and PC3 connect to the inband network port of the MA5105 over the local area network
(LAN). PC3 functions as the log host of the MA5105. Figure 4-1 shows the networking.

Figure 4-1 Networking for configuring the log host

LAN
PC1

PC2

PC3

1 Service board 1
Control
0 board 2 Service board 2

MA5105

4-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring a Log Host

Table 4-1 lists the data plan for configuring the log host.

Table 4-1 Data plan for configuring the log host


Item Data

Inband NMS interface of the MA5105 IP address: 10.10.10.2/24

PC3 IP address: 10.10.10.1/24

Procedure
Step 1 Add the log host.
huawei(config)#loghost add 10.10.10.1 huawei

Step 2 Activate the log host.


huawei(config)#loghost activate
{ip,name}:name
<server-name>:huawei
Activate host success.

Step 3 Configure the TFTP software on the log host.


1. Enable the Syslog server function.
2. Set the path for saving the reported logs.

----End

Result
l You can obtain the log files in the path set for saving the reported logs.
l The operation commands executed on PCs 1 and 2 to the system are recorded in the logs.
They are the same as those queried on the MA5105.

4.3 Adding a Log Host


After a log host is added, some important information of the device can be recorded on the log
host (also called log server) through the syslog mechanism.

Context
l The MA5105 records important information on the log server of the internal network
through the syslog mechanism. The log server can be a UNIX server or a Windows server.
l After adding a log host, activate it, and then enable the log host service on the log host. Set
the path and the name of the file for saving logs for uploading logs in real time.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the loghost add command to add a log host.
Step 2 Run the show loghost list command to query the information about the log host.

----End

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
4 Configuring a Log Host Configuration Guide

Example
To add a log host named log with the IP address of 10.11.136.56, do as follows:
huawei(config)#loghost add 10.11.136.56 log
huawei(config)#show loghost list all
IP address Host name Terminal state
--------------------------------------------------
40.50.30.3 huawei Activate
10.10.10.1 xiao Deactivate
10.11.136.56 log Deactivate
--------------------------------------------------
Total: 3

Related Operation
Table 4-2 lists the related operation for adding a log host.

Table 4-2 Related operation for adding a log host

To... Run the Command...

Activate a log host loghost activate

Deactivate the log host loghost deactivate

Delete the log host loghost delete

Query the information about the log host show loghost list

4.4 Deleting a Log Host


When the IP address of a log host changes or is not used any more, you can delete the log host.
After the log host is deleted, the system does not report log information to the log host.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the loghost delete command to delete a log host.

Step 2 Run the show loghost list command to query the information about the log host.

----End

Example
To delete the log host with the IP address of 10.10.10.1, do as follows:
huawei(config)#loghost delete ip 10.10.10.1
huawei(config)#show loghost list ip 10.10.10.1
Failure: Host not exists.

Related Operation
Table 4-3 lists the related operation for deleting a log host.

4-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring a Log Host

Table 4-3 Related operation for deleting a log host


To... Run the Command...

Add a log host loghost add

Activate a log host loghost activate

Deactivate a log host loghost deactivate

4.5 Activating a Log Host


After adding a log host, you need to activate the log host, because the system sends log
information only to the activated log host.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the loghost activate command to activate a log host.
Step 2 Run the show loghost list command to query the information about the log host.

----End

Example
To activate a log host named log, do as follows:
huawei(config)#loghost activate name log huawei(config)
#show loghost list name log
IP address : 10.11.136.56
Host name : log
Terminal state : Activate

Related Operation
Table 4-4 lists the related operation for activating a log host.

Table 4-4 Related operation for activating a log host


To... Run the Command...

Deactivate a log host loghost deactivate

Add the log host loghost add

Delete the log host loghost delete

4.6 Deactivating a Log Host


Before modifying or deleting the configuration of a log host, you need to deactivate the log host.
After the log host is deactivated, the system cannot report log information to the log host.

Context
The system sends log information only to the activated log host.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
4 Configuring a Log Host Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Run the loghost deactivate command to deactivate a log host.
Step 2 Run the show loghost list command to query the information about the log host.

----End

Example
To deactivate the log host with the IP address of 10.11.136.56, do as follows:
huawei(config)#loghost deactivate ip 10.11.136.56
huawei(config)#show loghost list ip 10.11.136.56
IP address : 10.11.136.56
Host name : log
Terminal state : Deactivate

Related Operation
Table 4-5 lists the related operation for deactivating a log host.

Table 4-5 Related operation for deactivating a log host

To... Run the Command...

Activate a log host loghost activate

Add the log host loghost add

Delete the log host loghost delete

4.7 Querying Logs


When you query the logs recorded on a log host, you can query the IP addresses, names, and
statuses of all configured log hosts.

Procedure
Run the show log command to query operation logs.
----End

Example
To query the latest three log records, do as follows:
huawei#show log all num 3
------------------------------------------------------------------------
USER NAME: root TIME: 2007/03/16 15:33:37.50
ADDRESS: 10.70.48.157
OPERATE: end
------------------------------------------------------------------------
USER NAME: root TIME: 2007/03/16 15:29:16.03
ADDRESS: 10.70.48.157
OPERATE: show loghost list ip 10.11.136.56
------------------------------------------------------------------------
USER NAME: root TIME: 2007/03/16 15:28:43.57

4-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 4 Configuring a Log Host

ADDRESS: 10.70.48.157
OPERATE: loghost deactivate ip 10.11.136.56

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 5 Managing the User

5 Managing the User

About This Chapter

Managing the user involves classifying, adding, changing, and deleting users.
5.1 Overview of Users
Users herein refer to persons who configure and maintain the MA5105 through CLI. Users of
different levels have different authority.
5.2 Adding a User
After being added, a user can access, configure, and manage the device.
5.3 Modifying the User Attributes
The changeable user attributes include the level, password, and telnet login authority.
5.4 Deleting a User
Only the super user and administrators can delete users of lower levels. The deleted user cannot
access, configure, and manage the device.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
5 Managing the User Configuration Guide

5.1 Overview of Users


Users herein refer to persons who configure and maintain the MA5105 through CLI. Users of
different levels have different authority.

Service Specifications

Based on various user rights, the MA5105 classifies users as the following levels: common users,
operators, and administrators. Each level of users can add the users of lower levels. Table 5-1
lists the authority for users of all levels.

Table 5-1 Authority for users of all levels

Level Authority

Common user Common users perform basic system operations and simple query
operations.

Operator Operators can configure the devices and services.

Administrator l Manage the system.


l Perform all operations.
l Manage the device, user accounts and user authority.

Each user has a unique user name and a self-defined password. When you log in, the system
checks whether your user name matches your password, and whether your user name is being
used at the moment. If your user name is in use, the system decides whether you can log in,
depending on the number of users allowed by the device.

The MA5105 allows three users to log in at a time, namely, one serial port user and two telnet
users. If two telnet users log in and one more user wants to log in, the system prompts "Too
many users" and terminates the telnet program simultaneously.

After passing the login authentication, all users first enter the user mode, and then enter other
modes based on their authority. Even in the same command mode, users with different rights
are entitled to perform different operations.

5.2 Adding a User


After being added, a user can access, configure, and manage the device.

Context
l Administrators can add the users of lower authority. That is, administrators can add only
operators and common users.
l The user name must be unique. It cannot be all or online.
l The super user or administrator can add multiple users to the system at a time. Up to 10
users can be added to the system. If user root is included, up to 11 users can be added.

5-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 5 Managing the User

l Users can be added only in privilege mode.


l Consider the device maintenance when configuring users and their authority. In principle,
exercise caution when you add administrators.
When adding a user, configure the user attributes, including the account, password, authority
and permission to telnet. Table 5-2 lists related details.

Table 5-2 User attributes


User Attributes Description

Account An account, also called a user name, consists of 1-19 printable


characters. This account must be unique. No space is allowed in the user
name. User names are not case sensitive.

Password A password consists of 1-19 characters. The password is case sensitive.

Support the Telnet "on" indicates that the Telnet login is supported, and "off" indicates that
login or not? the Telnet login is not supported.

Authority In terms of authority, users are divided into common users, operators,
and administrators.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the user name command to add a user.
Step 2 Run the show user command to query the user information.

----End

Example
Assume that the password of user huawei is huawei. The level is operator. The Telnet login is
allowed. To add such a user, do as follows:
huawei#user name huawei
> user level:
> 1: General
user
> 2:
Operator
> 3: Administrator
> Input level [1]:2
> Login password (<20 chars): // Enter the password: huawei
> Confirm password: // Enter the password: huawei
> Telnet permit ?{on|off}[on]:on
The user added to system successfully.
huawei#show user
<option>{all,online}:all
All users of console:
User Name Access Level Log Status Telnet
------------------- --------------------- ------------ ---------
root Super administrator online on
cmf27 Administrator offline on
h General user offline on
hh Administrator offline on
autotest Administrator offline on
gst Administrator offline on
huawei Operator user online on
------------------- --------------------- ------------ ---------

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
5 Managing the User Configuration Guide

Related Operation
Table 5-3 lists the related operation for adding a user.

Table 5-3 Related operation for adding a user

To... Run the Command... Remarks

Delete a user no user name l Only the super user and


administrators can delete the
users of lower levels.
l Users cannot delete themselves.
l User root cannot be deleted.
l An online user cannot be
deleted. To delete an online user,
you need to disconnect the user
first.
l Multiple users can be deleted at
a time.

5.3 Modifying the User Attributes


The changeable user attributes include the level, password, and telnet login authority.
5.3.1 Modifying the User Level
Only administrators can modify the authority of users of lower levels. Administrators can modify
these users only to the levels that are lower than the original levels. That is, the administrators
can modify users to operators or common users.
5.3.2 Modifying the User Password
Modifying the user password periodically helps to ensure the device security. Only user root
has the authority to modify the passwords of other users.
5.3.3 Modifying the Telnet Authority of a User
You can manage and maintain the device through the serial port or in telnet mode. When your
authority of telneting to the system or device is canceled, you need to manage and maintain the
device through the serial port only.

5.3.1 Modifying the User Level


Only administrators can modify the authority of users of lower levels. Administrators can modify
these users only to the levels that are lower than the original levels. That is, the administrators
can modify users to operators or common users.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the user modifyusernamelevel command to modify the user level.

Step 2 Run the show user command to query the user level.

----End

5-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 5 Managing the User

Example
To change common user huawei to an operator, do as follows:
huawei#user modify huawei level
> new user level:
> 1: General user
> 2: Operator
> 3: Administrator
> Input level [1]: 1
Level modified successfully.
huawei#show user all
All users of console:
User Name Access Level Log Status Telnet
------------------- --------------------- ------------ ---------
root Super administrator online on
autotest Administrator offline on
gst Administrator offline on
huawei General user online on

Related Operation
Table 5-4 lists the related operation for modifying the user level.

Table 5-4 Related operation for modifying the user level

To... Run the Command...

Modify the user user modifyusernamepassword


password

Modify the user level to user modifyusernametelnet


decide whether to
permit the Telnet login

5.3.2 Modifying the User Password


Modifying the user password periodically helps to ensure the device security. Only user root
has the authority to modify the passwords of other users.

Context
l Administrators can change the passwords of themselves and those of the users of lower
levels. When the administrator changes the passwords of the users of lower levels, the
original passwords are not required.
l Common users and operators can change only their own passwords, and need to enter the
original passwords.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the user modify command to change the user password.

Step 2 Log in to the device with the old user name and the new password.

----End

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
5 Managing the User Configuration Guide

Example
To change the password of common user huawei, do as follows:
huawei#user modify huawei password
> New password(<20 chars):
> Confirm new password:
Password modified successfully.

Related Operation
Table 5-5 lists the related operation for changing the user password.

Table 5-5 Related operation for changing the user password

To... Run the Command...

Modify the user level user modify username level

Modify the user level to decide whether to user modify username telnet
permit the Telnet login

5.3.3 Modifying the Telnet Authority of a User


You can manage and maintain the device through the serial port or in telnet mode. When your
authority of telneting to the system or device is canceled, you need to manage and maintain the
device through the serial port only.

Context
l Administrators can decide whether to permit the telnet login of themselves and that of the
users of lower levels.
l The telnet login attribute of the super user (with user name root) cannot be modified.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the user modify command to modify the user login mode.

Step 2 Run the show user command to query whether telnet login is permitted.

----End

Example
To permit the telnet login of common user huawei, do as follows:
huawei#user modify huawei telnet
> Telnet permit?{on|off}[on]:on
huawei#show user all
All users of console:
User Name Access Level Log Status Telnet
------------------- --------------------- ------------ ---------
root Super administrator online on
cmf27 Administrator offline on
huawei General user offline on

5-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 5 Managing the User

Related Operation
Table 5-6 lists the related operation for modifying the user login mode.

Table 5-6 Related operation for modifying the user login mode

To... Run the Command...

Modify a user password user modifyusernamepassword

Modify a user level user modifyusernamelevel

5.4 Deleting a User


Only the super user and administrators can delete users of lower levels. The deleted user cannot
access, configure, and manage the device.

Context
l Users cannot delete themselves.
l User root cannot be deleted.
l An online user cannot be deleted. To delete an online user, you need to disconnect the user
first.
l Multiple users can be deleted at a time.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the no terminal user name command to delete a user.

Step 2 Run the show_user to check whether the user is deleted.

----End

Example
To delete user huawei, do as follows:
huawei#no user name huawei
Really delete this user?(y/n) [n]y
This user has been deleted successfully.
huawei#show user all
All users of console:
User Name Access Level Log Status Telnet
root Super administrator online on
cmf27 Administrator offline on

Related Operation
Table 5-7 lists the related operation for deleting a user.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
5 Managing the User Configuration Guide

Table 5-7 Related operation for deleting a user


To... Run the Command...

Add a user user name

5-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 6 Managing the Board

6 Managing the Board

About This Chapter

Managing the board involves adding, deleting, and prohibiting a service board of the
MA5105.
6.1 Overview of Board Management
The MA5105 supports service boards and uplink boards. The board state involves: normal,
offline,, and prohibited.
6.2 Adding a Service Board
Adding service boards provides the offline data of service boards. That is, it is the operation
performed when a service board is not actually inserted. In this case, the system checks the data
that you configured. Adding service boards is designed for service boards only. A service board
works based on configurations after being inserted in the slot.
6.3 Deleting a Service Board
When a service board residing in a slot is faulty or the service board is no longer in need due to
capacity reduction, you can delete the service board. After deleting the service board, you can
insert another service board in the idle slot.
6.4 Prohibiting a Service Board
When an abnormality occurs on a service board or a port of the service board is faulty, you need
to prohibit the service board. After the service board is prohibited, all the services running on
the service board are stopped and you cannot perform any operation on the service board unless
the service board is enabled.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
6 Managing the Board Configuration Guide

6.1 Overview of Board Management


The MA5105 supports service boards and uplink boards. The board state involves: normal,
offline,, and prohibited.

Service Description

Table 6-1 lists the boards supported by the MA5105.

Table 6-1 Boards supported by the MA5105

Device Board Type Board Name Available Slot

MA5105 Uplink board MIEA, MIMA, and 0


MFCE/MFCS/MFCM

Service board ADCE and SHDA 1 or 2

Board Status

A service board has different running states, as listed in Table 6-2.

Table 6-2 Service board status

Status Remarks

Normal It is used for a service board.


It indicates that the physical link communication is normal.

Offline It is used for a service board.


It refers to the board added in the offline state.

Prohibited It is used for a service board.


It refers to the board whose normal services are interrupted after the
prohibition operation.

6.2 Adding a Service Board


Adding service boards provides the offline data of service boards. That is, it is the operation
performed when a service board is not actually inserted. In this case, the system checks the data
that you configured. Adding service boards is designed for service boards only. A service board
works based on configurations after being inserted in the slot.

Context
l In the system, service boards are hot swappable. The hardware is not damaged if the service
boards are removed when the system is running.
l Service boards can be inserted in idle slots only.

6-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 6 Managing the Board

l Service boards can reside only in slots 1–2.


l When a board is added, the board is in the Failed state. If the actual board type differs from
the offline added board type, the board is still in the Failed state. The state becomes normal
only when the corresponding board is inserted into the slot.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the board add command to add a service board.

Step 2 Run the show board command to query the information about service boards.

----End

Example
To add an ADCE board in 0/1, do as follows:
huawei(config)#board add adsl
<type>{h521adla,h521adlh,h521adli,h523adce,h523adch,h523adla}:h521adce
<frameId/slotId>{(0)/(1-2)}:0/1
huawei(config)#show board 0/1
Frame Slot Board Type Board State Interface Type PVC Number
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------
0 1 ADCE online - 0
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------

Port State LineProfileId AlarmProfileId ExtLineProfileId


---- ------------ ------------- -------------- ----------------
1 Activating 33 1 -
2 Activating 33 1 -
3 Activating 33 1 -
4 Activating 33 1 -
5 Activating 33 1 -
6 Activating 33 1 -
7 Activating 33 1 -
8 Activating 33 1 -
9 Activating 33 1 -
10 Activating 33 1 -
11 Activating 33 1 -
12 Activating 33 1 -
13 Activating 33 1 -
14 Activating 33 1 -
15 Activating 33 1 -
16 Activating 33 1 -
---------------------------------------------------------------------

Related Operation
Table 6-3 lists related operation for adding a service board.

Table 6-3 Related operation for adding a service board


To... Run the Command...

Delete a service board board delete

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
6 Managing the Board Configuration Guide

6.3 Deleting a Service Board


When a service board residing in a slot is faulty or the service board is no longer in need due to
capacity reduction, you can delete the service board. After deleting the service board, you can
insert another service board in the idle slot.

Context
l If the PVC connection exists on a service board, the board cannot be deleted. To delete the
board, delete the PVC connection first.
l The control board cannot be deleted.
l When a service board works in the normal state, it cannot be deleted.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the board delete command to delete a service board.

Step 2 Run the show board command to query the service board list.

----End

Example
To delete the service board residing in 0/1, do as follows:
huawei(config)#board delete 0/1
are you sure to delete this board? (y/n)[n]:y
Board delete successfully
huawei(config)#show board 0/1
Frame Slot Board Type Board State Interface Type PVC Number
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------
0 1 ADCE online - 0
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------

Port State LineProfileId AlarmProfileId ExtLineProfileId


---- ------------ ------------- -------------- ----------------
1 Activating 33 1 -
2 Activating 33 1 -
3 Activating 33 1 -
4 Activating 33 1 -
5 Activating 33 1 -
6 Activating 33 1 -
7 Activating 33 1 -
8 Activating 33 1 -
9 Activating 33 1 -
10 Activating 33 1 -
11 Activating 33 1 -
12 Activating 33 1 -
13 Activating 33 1 -
14 Activating 33 1 -
15 Activating 33 1 -
16 Activating 33 1 -
---------------------------------------------------------------------

Related Operation
Table 6-4 lists the related operation for deleting a service board.

6-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 6 Managing the Board

Table 6-4 Related operation for deleting a service board


To... Run the Command...

Add a service board board add

6.4 Prohibiting a Service Board


When an abnormality occurs on a service board or a port of the service board is faulty, you need
to prohibit the service board. After the service board is prohibited, all the services running on
the service board are stopped and you cannot perform any operation on the service board unless
the service board is enabled.

Context
l All the service boards can be prohibited except the one that communicates with the control
board.
l The control board cannot be prohibited.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the board prohibit command to prohibit a service board.
Step 2 Run the show board command to query the service board list.

----End

Example
To prohibit the service board residing in 0/1, do as follows:
huawei(config)#board prohibit 0/1
are you sure to prohibit this board? (y/n)[n]:y
huawei(config)#show board 0
Slot ID Board Type Board Name Board State
------- ---------- ---------- -----------
0 FE H521MFCE Normal
1 ADCE H523ADCE Prohibited
2 ADCE H523ADCE Normal
--------------------------------------------

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring a PVC

7 Configuring a PVC

About This Chapter

Configuring a PVC involves configuring a PVC on a LAN board, configuring the terminal
management PVC, and enabling the CAR function of a PVC.

7.1 Overview of PVCs


A permanent virtual circuit (PVC) is an ATM connection between a service port and an uplink
port. To implement various xDSL services for users, you must create PVCs.
7.2 Related PVC Concepts
The related PVC concepts on the MA5105 include service type, traffic type, traffic profile, traffic
classes, and traffic control.
7.3 Configuring a Traffic Class
When the default or the current traffic classes cannot meet the actual requirements, you need to
configure a traffic class.
7.4 Configuring the ATM Traffic Profile
When the MA5105 transmits packets upstream through the ATM control board, you can
configure the ATM traffic profile for setting a PVC and restricting PVC traffic.
7.5 Configuring a LAN Traffic Profile
When the MA5105 transmits packets upstream through the LAN control board, you need to
configure the LAN traffic profile. The LAN traffic profile can be used for setting a PVC and
restricting the PVC traffic.
7.6 Configuring a Service PVC for the E1 Port
The MIEA board supports the E1 upstream transmission. This operation enables you to set up
a service virtual connection so that the transparent transmission of the data can be implemented
between the xDSL port and the E1 port and QoS can be provided.
7.7 Configuring a Service PVC for the IMA Upstream Transmission
The MIMA board supports the IMA upstream transmission. This operation enables you to set
up a service virtual connection so that the transparent transmission of the data can be
implemented between the xDSL port and the IMA port and QoS can be provided.
7.8 Configuring a PVC on a LAN Board

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
7 Configuring a PVC Configuration Guide

When the MA5105 transmits packets upstream through the FE interface, you need to configure
a PVC between an xDSL port and a LAN board to implement the conversion between
asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) cells and media access control (MAC) frames.
7.9 Configuring the Terminal Management PVC
Terminal management means that the element management system (EMS) manages the
customer premises equipment (CPE). Inband management means that a computer (including
EMS) manages the MA5105. The terminal management PVC is a special inband PVC. It can
be set up on the ATM uplink board. That is, it is the PVC from the ADSL port to the CPU of
the device. The FE/GE uplink board does not support the terminal management PVC.
7.10 Enabling the CAR Function of a PVC
Committed access rate (CAR) refers to the rate of transmitting data from the LAN uplink board.
The LAN uplink board sends data according to the CAR to prevent data loss.

7-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring a PVC

7.1 Overview of PVCs


A permanent virtual circuit (PVC) is an ATM connection between a service port and an uplink
port. To implement various xDSL services for users, you must create PVCs.

Service Description

Table 7-1 lists the uplink boards and their PVC features.

Table 7-1 PVC features of the MA5105

Uplink Board PVC Features

MIMB The system supports up to 128 PVCs. Each ADSL port


supports up to eight PVCs.

Service Specifications

When configuring a PVC, pay attention to the following points:


l When configuring the PVC, plan the VPI/VCI value as required. The value must be within
the VPI/VCI range of the system.
l When the xDSL port interconnects with the modem, it is recommended to use the value
0/35 for the xDSL port. Use the default value of the modem.
l In the ATM upstream service, the VPI/VCI of the system must be consistent with that of
the upper layer device.

7.2 Related PVC Concepts


The related PVC concepts on the MA5105 include service type, traffic type, traffic profile, traffic
classes, and traffic control.

Service Type
The MA5105 supports four service types: CBR, rt-VBR, rt-VBR and UBR.

l CBR
The constant bit rate (CBR) service is used for connections that require static bandwidth
and the highest priority. It features high stability and low burst. Service data is delivered
in a fixed period with the smallest burst. The CBR applies to the circuit services, emulation
voice services and video services. Peak cell rate (PCR) is the only parameter required for
applying for the CBR service. The source end can send cells at the PCR rate or a rate lower
than PCR (or stop sending cells).
l rt-VBR
The real-time variable bit rate (rt-VBR) service is sensitive to delay and jitter of data stream.
It applies to voice services and interactive video services. Compared with the CBR service,
the rt-VBR service is more tolerant to burst. The source end can send the data at different

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
7 Configuring a PVC Configuration Guide

rates. Parameters required in applying for the rt-VBR service include: PCR, sustainable
cell rate (SCR) and max. burst size (MBS).
l nrt-VBR
The Non-real-time variable bit rate (nrt-VBR) service applies to non-real time services with
burst. It applies to IPTV. Compared with the rt-VBR service, the nrt-VBR has less
requirement on the delay and has lower priority than rt-VBR. Parameters required in
applying for the nrt-VBR service include: PCR, SCR and MBS.
l UBR
The unspecified bit rate (UBR) service applies to services with high burst and non-real-
time requirement. UBR users only demand best-effort service without QoS requirement.
The network does not provide QoS for the UBR service. When network congestion occurs,
UBR cells are the first to be dropped. Error correction is carried out by the upper layer
protocols. The typical applications are the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) and email.
The MA5105 supports four service types and 13 traffic types as defined in RFC2514. Different
traffic types require different parameters. Table 7-2 lists the mapping between the traffic types
and parameters.

Table 7-2 Mapping between the traffic types and parameters


Service Traffic Type Paramete Paramete Para Param
Type r1 r2 mete eter 4
r3

CBR NO_CLP_NO_SCR CLP01PC - - -


R

NO_CLP_NO_SCR_CDVT CLP01PC CDVT - -


R

CLP_TRANSPARENT_NO_SC CLP01PC CDVT - -


R R

rt_VBR CLP_TRANSPARENT_SCR CLP01PC CLP01SC MBS CDVT


R R

NO_CLP_SCR_CDVT CLP01PC CLP01SC MBS CDVT


R R

CLP_NO_TAGGING_SCR_CD CLP01PC CLP0SCR MBS CDVT


VT R

CLP_TAGGING_SCR_CDVT CLP01PC CLP0SCR MBS CDVT


R

nrt_VB NO_CLP_SCR CLP01PC CLP01SC MBS -


R R R

CLP_NO_TAGGING_SCR CLP01PC CLP0SCR MBS -


R

CLP_TAGGING_SCR CLP01PC CLP0SCR MBS -


R

7-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring a PVC

Service Traffic Type Paramete Paramete Para Param


Type r1 r2 mete eter 4
r3

UBR NO_CLP_NO_SCR CLP01PC - - -


R

NO_CLP_NO_SCR_CDVT CLP01PC CLP01SC MBS CDVT


R R

NO_CLP_TAGGING_NO_SCR CLP01PC CDVT - -


R

When creating a PVC, you need to reference traffic profiles at the source end and the destination
end respectively. A traffic profile defines the index of the profile, service type, traffic type, and
parameter values. The traffic profile is used for traffic control.
l When configuring a traffic profile, set the parameters as required. The system provides 32
traffic classes for parameter CLP01PCR of the CBR service and parameter SCR
(CPL01SCR or CLP0SCR) of the rt-VBR service (supporting traffic shaping). When
configuring the traffic profile, select one from the 32 traffic classes for each of the two
parameters.
l In the same way, the system provides 16 traffic classes for parameters CPL01SCR and
CLP0SCR of the rt-VBR service (not supporting traffic shaping). When configuring the
traffic profile, select one from the 16 traffic classes for each of the two parameters.
l The CBR and rt-VBR services provided by the MA5105 support traffic shaping. For the
rt-VBR service, you can decide whether to shape the traffic based on the actual
requirements.
l When configuring the traffic profile for the CBR and rt-VBR services, the system
automatically sets the rate required by the services to the next value that is larger than the
preset value, if the required rate does not exist in the traffic class table.
Pay attention to the following points in traffic control:
l Control the traffic at the access side and monitor the traffic at the convergence side.
l Control the traffic in the area where traffic convergence and network congestion may occur.
l Control the traffic in the area near the source.
l Control the traffic in the area where switching nodes are located.
l Control the traffic on each node when end-to-end QoS is required.
l The total bandwidth of a PVC depends on the smallest SCR in the nodes of the PVC.
Therefore, the traffic can be controlled on any node of the PVC.
l If a service passes through multiple nodes, the bandwidth of a user depends on the smallest
SCR of the nodes.
l Traffic control does not involve only a certain device. It involves the whole network. Since
the MA5105 is located on the access layer, control the traffic on the MA5105 to reduce the
service burst and stabilize the service traffic. Traffic monitoring can be performed on the
upper layer device.
The following is the recommended configuration for traffic control:
l For family users, select UBR as the service and NO_CLP_NO_SCR as the traffic type.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
7 Configuring a PVC Configuration Guide

l For net bar users, select rt-VBR as the service and NO_CLP_SCR_CDVT as the traffic
type. Table 7-3 lists the parameters for the rt-VBR service with traffic type
NO_CLP_SCR_CDVT.

Table 7-3 Parameters of the rt-VBR service (with traffic type NO_CLP_SCR_CDV)

Rate PCR SCR MBS (cell) CDVT (1/10us) UPC/EPD/


Classes (kbps) (kbps) PPD

512 k 1,024 512 600 9,000,000 111

1M 2,000 1,000 600 10,000,000 111

2M 4,000 2,000 600 10,000,000 111

4M 8,000 4,000 600 10,000,000 111

6M 12,000 6,000 600 10,000,000 111

8M 16,000 8,000 600 10,000,000 111

10 M 20,000 10,000 600 10,000,000 111

20 M 40,000 20,000 600 10,000,000 111

50 M 100,000 50,000 600 10,000,000 111

100 M 149,760 100,000 600 10,000,000 111

149 M 149,760 149,760 600 10,000,000 111

7.3 Configuring a Traffic Class


When the default or the current traffic classes cannot meet the actual requirements, you need to
configure a traffic class.

Context
l By default, there are 32 traffic classes for the CBR service: 64, 100, 128, 192, 256, 384,
512, 640, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1200, 1500, 1800, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3500, 4000, 4500,
5000, 6144, 6500, 7000, 8000, 9000, 10000, 11000, 12000, 14000, and 16000.
l There are 16 traffic classes for the rt-VBR service: 64, 128, 192, 256, 384, 512, 800, 1000,
1500, 2000, 4000, 6000, 8000, 10000, 12000, and 16000.

Pay attention to the following points when setting a traffic class:

l The system provides the default values for the CBR traffic class table and the rt-VBR traffic
class table. It is recommended that you use the default values. If the default values cannot
meet the actual requirements, modify the traffic class tables. Before modifying the traffic
class tables, make a comprehensive plan for the traffic classes for the whole system to
prevent frequent changes later.
l Two same traffic classes are not allowed in the system.
l Before modifying a traffic class, make sure that the traffic class is not referenced before.
Otherwise, the modification fails.

7-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring a PVC

Procedure
Step 1 Run the rank command to modify a traffic class table.

Step 2 Run the show rank command to query the information about the traffic class table.

----End

Example
To modify the original traffic class 64 of the CBR service to 80, do as follows:
huawei(config)#rank cbr 64 80
huawei(config)#show rank cbr
Rank of CBR.
NO. Rank(kbps) Ref. count
----- ---------- ---------
0 80 0
1 100 0
2 128 0
3 192 1
4 256 0
5 384 0
……

……

29 12000 0
30 14000 0
31 16000 1

Related Operation
Table 7-4 lists the related operation for configuring a traffic class.

Table 7-4 Related operation for configuring a traffic class

To... Run the Command...

Query the inband NMS PVC show pvc

7.4 Configuring the ATM Traffic Profile


When the MA5105 transmits packets upstream through the ATM control board, you can
configure the ATM traffic profile for setting a PVC and restricting PVC traffic.

Context
l When services travel upstream through the MIMA board, the system supports up to 50
traffic profiles. The system provides four ATM traffic profiles for users to directly
reference. The attribute of the profiles is system. The indexes are 1, 2, 3, and 4 respectively.
The attribute of an added ATM traffic profile is user.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
7 Configuring a PVC Configuration Guide

l When services travel upstream though the MIEA board, the system does not support the
adding of traffic profiles. The system provides two UBR traffic profiles for users to directly
reference. The attribute of the two profiles is system. The indexes are 1 and 2 respectively.
When adding an ATM traffic profile in the condition that services travel upstream through the
MIMA board, pay attention to the following points:
l Two same traffic profiles are not allowed.
l The traffic size must be smaller than the processing capability of the system. After a traffic
profile is added successfully, the system displays the index of the traffic profile.
l When adding a traffic profile for the CBR service, select a value for the PCR from the CBR
traffic class table. If the entered PCR does not exist in the traffic class table, the system
automatically adjusts the PCR to the next value that is larger than the preset value. Similar
to the CBR service, the SCR of the rt-VBR service also needs to be selected from the rt-
VBR traffic class table.
l If the MIMA board is attached with the APC subboard, the MIMA board supports the
settings of the early packet discard (EPD) and partial packet discard (PPD).

Procedure
Step 1 Run the traffic-profile command to create a PVC traffic profile.
Step 2 Run the show traffic-profile command to query the configuration of a traffic entry. After
running the command, select parameter all, the system displays the traffic parameters and all
traffic profiles.

----End

Example
To add a traffic profile for the CBR service when services travel upstream through the MIMA
board, do as follows:
huawei(config)#traffic-profile
{cbr,rt-vbr,nrt-vbr,ubr}:cbr
{NoClpNoScr,NoClpNoScrCdvt,ClpTransparentNoScr}:clpTransparentNoScr
{pcr}:pcr
<rate>{0-16000}:4000
[cdvt]:cdvt
<cdvtval>{0-26738680}:50
[epd]:
[ppd]:
[<index>]{5-50}:5
Add traffic profile successfully, TID = 5.
huawei(config)#show traffic-profile
{<Traffic Type>}{all,cbr,rt-vbr,nrt-vbr,ubr}:all
Traffic type definition:
1 : NO_CLP_NO_SCR 2 : CLP_NO_TAGGING_NO_SCR[D]
3 : CLP_TAGGING_NO_SCR[D] 4 : NO_CLP_SCR
5 : CLP_NO_TAGGING_SCR 6 : CLP_TAGGING_SCR
7 : CLP_NO_TAGGING_MCR[D] 8 : CLP_TRANSPARENT_NO_SCR
9 : CLP_TRANSPARENT_SCR 10: NO_CLP_TAGGING_NO_SCR
11: NO_CLP_NO_SCR_CDVT 12: NO_CLP_SCR_CDVT
13: CLP_NO_TAGGING_SCR_CDVT 14: CLP_TAGGING_SCR_CDVT
TID Service Traff.CLP01PCR CLP0PCR CLP01SCR CLP0SCR MBS CDVT EPD/PPD
Type Type kbps kbps kbps kbps cells 1/10us
---- -------- ------ -------- ------- -------- ------- ------- ----
1 UBR 1 512 -- -- -- -- -- off/
off
2 nrt-VBR 4 512 -- 512 -- 512 -- off/

7-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring a PVC

off
3 rt-VBR 14 256 -- -- 64 500 10000000 off/
off
4 CBR 1 1500 -- -- -- -- -- off/
off
5 CBR 8 4000 -- -- -- -- 50 off/
off
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Record number: 5

Related Operation
Table 7-5 lists the related operation for configuring the ATM traffic profile.

Table 7-5 Related operation for configuring the ATM traffic profile

To... Run the Command...

Query the configuration of a traffic entry show traffic-profile

7.5 Configuring a LAN Traffic Profile


When the MA5105 transmits packets upstream through the LAN control board, you need to
configure the LAN traffic profile. The LAN traffic profile can be used for setting a PVC and
restricting the PVC traffic.

Context
l The system supports up to 20 traffic entries. The entries with indexes 1–3 are default. They
cannot be modified or deleted. Other 17 entries can be configured or deleted. In the actual
configuration, if the entered value is not a multiple of 64, the system automatically adjusts
the traffic to a larger granularity. The minimum granularity of the average traffic is 64 Kbit/
s.
l When configuring a PVC, choose the corresponding traffic entry to implement traffic
control.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the traffic-profile command to configure the traffic profile.
Step 2 Run the show traffic-profile command to query the configured traffic profile.

----End

Example
To configure a traffic profile, do as follows:
huawei(config)#traffic-profile 4086 5
huawei(config)#show traffic-profile all
TID Average Bandwidth(Kbps) Reference Count
---- --------------------- ---------------
1 2560 8
2 5120 1024
3 10240 2048
4 16000 4096
5 4086 10048

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
7 Configuring a PVC Configuration Guide

-------------------------------------------------
Record number: 5

7.6 Configuring a Service PVC for the E1 Port


The MIEA board supports the E1 upstream transmission. This operation enables you to set up
a service virtual connection so that the transparent transmission of the data can be implemented
between the xDSL port and the E1 port and QoS can be provided.

Context
When the upstream transmission is implemented on the MIEA board, the system supports up to
64 service PVCs. Each xDSL port supports up to two PVCs.

l The VPI and VCI of each port are unique and they are the same as that of the peer device.
l Only traffic profile 1 can be selected for the PVC of the MIEA board.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the pvc command to set up an xDSL–E1 PVC.

Step 2 Run the show pvc command to query the information about the PVC of the MIEA board.

----End

Example
To set up a PVC from port 1, and slot 1 of the ADCE board to port 1 of the MIEA board, do as
follows:
huawei(config)#pvc
{adsl,shdsl,atm,nms}:adsl
<FrameId/SlotId/PortId>{(0)/(1-2)/(1-16)}:0/1/1
{<vpi>}{0-15}:0
{<vci>}{32-127}:35
{adsl,shdsl,atm,nms}:atm
<FrameId/SlotId/PortId>{(0)/(0)/(1-4)}:0/0/1
{<vpi>}{0-15}:0
{<vci>}{32-511}:32
<Rx-cttr>{1-2}:1
<tx-cttr>{1-2}:1
huawei(config)#show pvc
{all,nms,cid,slot,port}:all
Source Sink Traffic
CID Type Frame Slot Port VPI VCI Type Frame Slot Port VPI VCI RX TX
--- ---- ---- ----- ---- --- ---- ---- ----- ---- ---- --- --- -- --
1 NMS -- -- -- -- -- ATM 0 0 1 0 100 1 1
2 ADL 0 1 1 0 35 ATM 0 0 1 0 32 1 1
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Record number: 2

Related Operation
Table 7-6 lists the related operation for configuring a service PVC for the E1 port.

7-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring a PVC

Table 7-6 Related operation for configuring a service PVC for the E1 port
To... Run the Command...

Query the information about the PVC of show pvc


the MIEA board

Delete an xDSL–E1 PVC no pvc

7.7 Configuring a Service PVC for the IMA Upstream


Transmission
The MIMA board supports the IMA upstream transmission. This operation enables you to set
up a service virtual connection so that the transparent transmission of the data can be
implemented between the xDSL port and the IMA port and QoS can be provided.

Context
When the upstream transmission is implemented on the MIMA board, the system supports up
to 256 service PVCs. Each xDSL port supports up to eight PVCs. Each PVC supports the usage
parameter control function.
When adding a service PVC for the IMA upstream transmission, pay attention to the following
points:
l Reference a proper traffic profile based in the service requirements.
l The VPI and VCI of each port are unique and they are the same as that of the peer device.
l Parameter portId corresponds to the index of the IMA group. The MA5105 supports only
one IMA group. Therefore, the value of portId is 1.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the pvc command to set up an xDSL–IMA PVC.
Step 2 Run the show pvc command to query the information about the PVC of the MIMA board.

----End

Example
To set up the NMS PVC of the MIMA board, do as follows:
huawei(config)#pvc
{adsl,shdsl,atm,nms}:atm
<FrameId/SlotId/PortId>{(0)/(0)/(1-2)}:0/0/1
{<vpi>}{0-255}:0
{<vci>}{32-1023}:100
{adsl,shdsl,atm,nms}:nms
{ipoa,1483b}:ipoa
<ip>:10.11.104.1
<rx-cttr>{1-50}:3
<tx-cttr>{1-50}:3
<rx-UPC>{off,on}[off]:off
<tx-UPC>{off,on}[off]:off
Add NMS PVC successfully, CID = 1.

To configure a PVC from the ADSL port to the ATM port, do as follows:

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
7 Configuring a PVC Configuration Guide

huawei(config)#pvc
{adsl,shdsl,atm,nms}:adsl
<FrameId/SlotId/PortId>{(0)/(1-2)/(1-16)}:0/1/1
{<vpi>}{0-31}:0
{<vci>}{32-127}:35
adsl,shdsl,atm,nms}:atm
<FrameId/SlotId/PortId>{(0)/(0)/(1-1)}:0/0/1
{<vpi>}{0-255}:0
{<vci>}{32-1023}:32
<rx-cttr>{1-50}:3
<tx-cttr>{1-50}:3
<rx-UPC>{off,on}[off]:off
<tx-UPC>{off,on}[off]:off
Add PVC successfully, CID = 2.
huawei(config)#show pvc
{all,nms,cid,slot,port,traffic}:all
( Interface: Frame/Slot/Port )
( Port: IMA's group, others port )
Source Sink Traffic
CID Type Interface VPI VCI Type Interface VPI VCI RX TX
----- ---- --------- ---- ----- ---- --------- ---- ----- ---- ----
1 NMS --/--/-- -- -- ATM 0/0/1 10 113 1 1
2 ADL 0/1/1 0 32 ATM 0/0/1 10 32 2 2
3 ADL 0/1/2 0 32 ATM 0/0/1 10 33 7 7
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Record number: 3

Related Operation
Table 7-7 lists the related operation for configuring a service PVC for IMA upstream
transmission.

Table 7-7 Related operation for configuring a service PVC for IMA upstream transmission

To... Run the Command...

Query the information about the PVC of show pvc


the MIMA board

Delete an xDSL–IMA PVC no pvc

7.8 Configuring a PVC on a LAN Board


When the MA5105 transmits packets upstream through the FE interface, you need to configure
a PVC between an xDSL port and a LAN board to implement the conversion between
asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) cells and media access control (MAC) frames.

Prerequisite
Before configuring the PVC, set a VLAN on the LAN board.

Context
l When configuring the PVC, choose the required traffic index to control the service traffic
of the PVC.
l If the LAN board is used for upstream transmission, the MA5105 does not require the NMS
PVC.

7-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring a PVC

Procedure
Step 1 Run the pvc command to configure the PVC from the LAN to the ADSL port.
Step 2 Run the show pvc command to query the configured PVC.

----End

Example
To configure a PVC from an ADSL port to the LAN board, do as follows:
huawei(config)#pvc adsl 0/1/1 0 35 lan 0/0 80 1
{disable,innerVlanID}:innervlanid
<inner vlanId>{1-4095}:10
<inner vlan priority>{0-7}:2
<inner vlan check>{on,off}:on
<rx-car>{on,off}:on
<tx-car>{on,off}:on
<rx-cttr>{1-20}:3
<tx-cttr>{1-20}:3
Add PVC successfully, CID = 2
huawei(config)#show pvc all
( Interface: Frame/Slot/Port )
( Port: FE's VLAN, others port )
Source Sink Traffic
CID Type Interface VPI VCI Type Interface VPI VCI RX TX
----- ---- --------- ---- ----- ---- --------- ---- ----- ---- ----
1 ADL 0/1/3 0 32 LAN 0/0/---- -- -- 2 2

2 ADL 0/1/1 0 35 LAN 0/0/---- -- -- 3 3


3 ADL 0/2/2 0 35 LAN 0/0/---- -- -- 3 3
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Record number: 3

7.9 Configuring the Terminal Management PVC


Terminal management means that the element management system (EMS) manages the
customer premises equipment (CPE). Inband management means that a computer (including
EMS) manages the MA5105. The terminal management PVC is a special inband PVC. It can
be set up on the ATM uplink board. That is, it is the PVC from the ADSL port to the CPU of
the device. The FE/GE uplink board does not support the terminal management PVC.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the pvc command to configure a PVC.
Step 2 Run the show pvc to query the PVC information.

----End

Example
To set up the NMS PVC on the MIMA board, do as follows:
huawei(config)#pvc atm 0/0/1 0 100
{adsl,shdsl,atm,nms}:nms
{ipoa,1483b}:ipoa
<ip>:10.11.104.1
<rx-cttr>{1-50}:3

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
7 Configuring a PVC Configuration Guide

<tx-cttr>{1-50}:3
<rx-UPC>{off,on}[off]:off
<tx-UPC>{off,on}[off]:off
Add NMS PVC successfully, CID = 1.
huawei(config)#show pvc all
( Interface: Frame/Slot/Port )
Source Sink Traffic
CID Type Interface VPI VCI Type Interface VPI VCI RX TX
----- ---- --------- ---- ----- ---- --------- ---- ----- ---- ----
1 NMS --/--/-- -- -- ATM 0/0/1 0 100 3 3

2 ADL 0/1/1 0 32 ATM 0/0/1 0 32 1 1


--------------------------------------------------------------------
Record number: 2

Related Operation
Table 7-8 lists the related operation for configuring the terminal management PVC.

Table 7-8 Related operation for configuring the terminal management PVC
To... Run the Command...

Query the PVC information show pvc

Set up the xDSL-LAN PVC pvc

Set up the xDSL-IMA PVC pvc

7.10 Enabling the CAR Function of a PVC


Committed access rate (CAR) refers to the rate of transmitting data from the LAN uplink board.
The LAN uplink board sends data according to the CAR to prevent data loss.

Prerequisite
A PVC already exists.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the car command to enable the traffic control function of a PVC.
Step 2 Run the show pvc to query the information about the PVP connection.

----End

Example
To enable the bidirectional CAR of PVC with the index of 1, do as follows:
huawei(config)#car cid 1 both
huawei(config)#show pvc all
( Interface: Frame/Slot/Port )
( Port: FE's VLAN, others port )
Source Sink Traffic
CID Type Interface VPI VCI Type Interface VPI VCI RX
TX
----- ---- -------------- ---- ---- ---- ------------- ---- ---- ---- ----
1 LAN 0/0/100(101) -0- 35 -- SHDL 0/2/1 8 35
1 1

7-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 7 Configuring a PVC

2 LAN 0/0/60(62) -- -- SHDL 0/2/2 8 35


1 1
3 LAN 0/0/60(63) -- -- SHDL 0/2/3 8 35
1 1
4 LAN 0/0/60(64) -- -- SHDL 0/2/4 8 35
1 1
5 LAN 0/0/60(65) -- -- SHDL 0/2/5 8 35
1 1
6 LAN 0/0/60(66) -- -- SHDL 0/2/6 8 35
1 1
7 LAN 0/0/60(67) -- -- SHDL 0/2/7 8 35
1 1
8 LAN 0/0/60(68) -- -- SHDL 0/2/8 8 35
1 1
9 ADL 0/3/4 0 35 LAN 0/0/80(10) -- --
3 3
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Record number: 9

Related Operation
Table 7-9 lists the related operation for enabling the CAR function of a PVC.

Table 7-9 Related operation for enabling the CAR function of a PVC
To... Run the Command...

Disable the traffic control function of a no car


PVC

Query the information about the PVC show pvc


connection

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 8 Managing the MAC Address

8 Managing the MAC Address

About This Chapter

Managing the MAC address involves the configuration of the MAC address and the MAC
address pool.

8.1 Overview of the MAC Address


The MA5105 supports the media access control (MAC) address self-learning function. You can
set the aging time of a dynamic MAC address.
8.2 Configuring MAC Address Self-Learning
After the MAC address self-learning function is configured successfully, the xDSL port will
automatically learn MAC addresses. By setting the maximum number of MAC addresses learned
by a service port, you can restrict the number of users accessing this port.
8.3 Configuring the Aging Time of a Dynamic MAC Address
Configuring the aging time of a dynamic MAC address can implement the MAC address aging.
If a device does not send any packet within the aging time range, its corresponding MAC address
is deleted from the MAC address table.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
8 Managing the MAC Address Configuration Guide

8.1 Overview of the MAC Address


The MA5105 supports the media access control (MAC) address self-learning function. You can
set the aging time of a dynamic MAC address.

Service Description
To bear multiple services, the MA5105 supports the MAC address table.
The MAC address table supported by the MA5105 can learn MAC addresses. If the source
address of a received packet does not exist in the address table, the MA5105 can add the source
address and the port number of the received packet to the address table as a new entry.
Meanwhile, the dynamic MAC addresses in the MAC address table can age. If the MA5105
does not receive the packets from a device within a certain time, the system deletes the address
entry related to the device.

The MA5105 supports 1024 MAC addresses.

8.2 Configuring MAC Address Self-Learning


After the MAC address self-learning function is configured successfully, the xDSL port will
automatically learn MAC addresses. By setting the maximum number of MAC addresses learned
by a service port, you can restrict the number of users accessing this port.

Context
l By default, the maximum number of MAC addresses learned by a service port is 1023.
l By default, the index of traffic suppression for broadcast frames is 16. The index of traffic
suppression for unknown unicast frames is 4.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface lan command to enter the LAN mode.
Step 2 Run the mode mac-learn command to configure MAC address self-learning.
Step 3 Run the show mac-learn command to query the configuration of the MAC address self-learning.

----End

Example
To configure the MAC address self-learning and set the maximum number of MAC address
learned by a service port as 1023, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface lan 0/0
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#mode mac-learn all 1023
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#show mac-learn
Mac address learn max number(0 means close):
Example : 1 <- Port id
----
1023 <- Max MAC addresses can be learned on this port

8-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 8 Managing the MAC Address

----------------------------------------------
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023
----------------------------------------------
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023
----------------------------------------------
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023
----------------------------------------------
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023 1023
----------------------------------------------

8.3 Configuring the Aging Time of a Dynamic MAC


Address
Configuring the aging time of a dynamic MAC address can implement the MAC address aging.
If a device does not send any packet within the aging time range, its corresponding MAC address
is deleted from the MAC address table.

Context
l By default, the aging time of a MAC address is 296s. In general, the default value is
recommended.
l If the aging time is too short, the dynamic MAC address entry is deleted quickly. Therefore,
the packet matching the address entry is broadcast because of the failure in finding the
destination address, thus affecting the running performance of the device.
l If the aging time is overlong, the idle MAC address entry persists in the MAC address table
for a long time. This exhausts the resources of the address table, and makes the device
unable to update the address table according to network changes. Therefore, a large number
of packets are broadcast because of the failure in finding the destination addresses.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface lan command to enter the LAN mode.
Step 2 Run the mac-address-table command to configure the aging time of a dynamic MAC address.
Step 3 Run the show mac-table command to query the information about the MAC address table.

----End

Example
To configure the aging time of a MAC address as 64s, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface lan 0/0huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#mode aging threshold 64
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#show mac-table all
Index Cid Bind VlanId Port MacAddress
-------------------------------------------------
1 2 1 1 1/1 1a-2f-3e-4a-5f-6f
-------------------------------------------------
Total: 1

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
8 Managing the MAC Address Configuration Guide

Related Operation
Table 8-1 lists the related operation for configuring the aging time of a dynamic MAC address.

Table 8-1 Related operation for configuring the aging time of a dynamic MAC address
To... Run the Command... Remarks

Cancel the configured aging no mode aging Restore the default value.
time of a MAC address

8-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring User Security

9 Configuring User Security

About This Chapter

Configuring user security involves enabling PITP, enabling the PITP option82 function,
configuring the encoding format of PITP, configuring the binding between a PVC and an IP
address, and configuring the binding between a PVC and a MAC address.

9.1 Overview of User Security


The policy Information Transfer Protocol (PITP) is a member of Huawei Group Management
Protocol (HGMP) family.
9.2 Enabling PITP
The MA5105 supports the PITP protocol. Such information as the user account, physical port
number, MAC address, and VPI/VCI are carried in a PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) authentication
request packet and the information is submitted to the BRAS for authentication. In this way, the
identification problem of a broadband user is solved and the binding of the user account and the
user port is implemented.
9.3 Enabling the PITP Option82 Function
The PITP option82 function is used for authenticating packets of DHCP requests. By adding
such user information as the number of a physical port, MAC address, and VPI/VCI in DHCP
packets, the system ensures that legal users can obtain dynamic IP addresses successfully.
9.4 Configuring the Encoding Format of PITP
After the encoding format of PITP is configured, the requirements of the BRAS for protocol
encoding format can be met when the device interworks with BRASs from other manufacturers.
9.5 Configuring the Binding Between a PVC and an IP Address
When the address binding is enabled between a PVC and an IP address, the packets only from
the IP address are legal and the packets from other IP addresses are considered as illegal and are
discarded.
9.6 Configuring the Binding Between a PVC and a MAC Address
When the address binding is enabled between a PVC and a MAC address, only the packets from
the MAC address are legal and the packets from other MAC addresses are considered as illegal
and are discarded.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
9 Configuring User Security Configuration Guide

9.1 Overview of User Security


The policy Information Transfer Protocol (PITP) is a member of Huawei Group Management
Protocol (HGMP) family.

Service Description

The services that travel through the FE port provide a series of security features. This helps to
improve the network running security for carriers.

PITP provides the broadband remote access server (BRAS) with the information about the ports
of access users. After receiving the port information, the BRAS authenticates the binding
between an user account and an access port. This avoids the embezzlement and roaming of user
accounts.

The services that travel through the FE port provides the following security features:

l Address binding
l MAC address self-learning
l MAC address aging
l MAC address filtering
l PITP function
l 802.1p priority
l Traffic suppression

9.2 Enabling PITP


The MA5105 supports the PITP protocol. Such information as the user account, physical port
number, MAC address, and VPI/VCI are carried in a PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE) authentication
request packet and the information is submitted to the BRAS for authentication. In this way, the
identification problem of a broadband user is solved and the binding of the user account and the
user port is implemented.

Context
PITP works in two modes: vmode and pmode. They are independent from each other. The
difference between them is as follows:

l vmode is used when the BRAS queries user information from the MA5105.
l pmode is used when the MA5105 submits the user information to the BRAS.

When PITP works in vmode, the type of the PITP protocol must be the same as that on the peer
device. By default, the protocol type is 0x8200.

By default, the PITP function is disabled.

9-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring User Security

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface lan command to enter the LAN mode.
Step 2 Run the pitp switch command to set the PITP function.
Step 3 Run the show pitp command to query the configuration of PITP.

----End

Example
To set the PITP mode as pmode and to enable PITP, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface lan 0/0
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#pitp switch pmode
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#show pitp
PITP protocol switch = PMODE
PITP Option82 = Off
PITP protocol code type = CNTEL_MODE

To set the PITP mode as vmode and the protocol type as 0x8200, and to enable PITP, do as
follows:
huawei(config)#interface lan 0/0
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#pitp switch vmode 0x8200
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#show pitp
PITP protocol switch = VMODE
PITP Option82 = Off
PITP protocol code type = CNTEL_MODE

Related Operation
Table 9-1 lists the related operation for enabling PITP.

Table 9-1 Related operation for enabling PITP

To... Run the Command...

Query the configuration of PITP show pitp

9.3 Enabling the PITP Option82 Function


The PITP option82 function is used for authenticating packets of DHCP requests. By adding
such user information as the number of a physical port, MAC address, and VPI/VCI in DHCP
packets, the system ensures that legal users can obtain dynamic IP addresses successfully.

Context
The PITP option82 function resolves such security problems as too much DHCP broadcast,
HDCP IP exhaustion, IP address snooping, and user ID snooping.
By default, the PITP option82 function is disabled.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface lan command to enter the LAN mode.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
9 Configuring User Security Configuration Guide

Step 2 Run the pitp switch command to set the PITP option82 function.

Step 3 Run the show pitp command to query the configuration of PITP.

----End

Example
To enable the PITP option82 function, do as follows:
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#pitp option82 on
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#show pitp
PITP protocol switch = Off
PITP Option82 = On
PITP protocol code type = COMMON_MODE

Related Operation
Table 9-2 lists the related operation for enabling the PITP option82 function.

Table 9-2 Related operation for enabling the PITP option82 function

To... Run the Command...

Query the configuration of PITP show pitp

9.4 Configuring the Encoding Format of PITP


After the encoding format of PITP is configured, the requirements of the BRAS for protocol
encoding format can be met when the device interworks with BRASs from other manufacturers.

Context
PITP has two encoding formats: universal encoding format and China Telecom encoding format.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface lan command to enter the LAN mode.

Step 2 Run the pitp code-type command to configure the encoding format of PITP.

Step 3 Run the show pitp command to query the configuration of PITP.

----End

Example
To set the encoding format of PITP as China Telecom, do as follows:
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#pitp code-type cnTel
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#show pitp
PITP protocol switch = VMODE
PITP VMODE ethertype = 0x8200
PITP Option82 = Off
PITP protocol code type = CNTEL_MODE

9-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring User Security

Related Operation
Table 9-3 lists the related operation for configuring the encoding format of PITP.

Table 9-3 Related operation for configuring the encoding format of PITP
To... Run the Command...

Query the configuration of PITP show pitp

Configure the PITP function pitp switch

9.5 Configuring the Binding Between a PVC and an IP


Address
When the address binding is enabled between a PVC and an IP address, the packets only from
the IP address are legal and the packets from other IP addresses are considered as illegal and are
discarded.

Context
Each PVC can be bound with one IP address and one MAC address.
The MFCE board supports only the MAC address binding. It does not support the IP address
binding.
Pay attention to the following points when configuring the address binding:
l The address binding is for users with static IP addresses. The address binding can be enabled
or disabled on each PVC.
l IP address binding has nothing related to MAC address learning and binding.

After the address binding is configured, the restrictions on user access is as follows:
l The services that are bound with addresses can be normally ongoing.
l If you need to delete the PVC on which the address binding is enabled, disable the address
binding first.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface lan command to enter the LAN mode.
Step 2 Run the ip-pvc command to set the IP address binding for a PVC.
Step 3 Run the show ip-pvc command to query the IP address binding information.

----End

Example
To set that the PVC with index 2 is bound with IP address 10.11.105.1, do as follows:
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#ip-pvc 10.11.105.1 2
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#show ip-pvc all
Cid VlanId xDSL port IP address

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
9 Configuring User Security Configuration Guide

------ ------ --------- -------------------


2 102 0/3/2 10.11.105.1
----------------------------------------------
Record number: 1

Related Operation
Table 9-4 lists the related operation for configuring the binding between a PVC and an IP
address.

Table 9-4 Related operation for configuring the binding between a PVC and an IP address

To... Run the Command...

Query IP address binding information show ip-pvc

Delete the IP address binding for a PVC no ip-pvc

9.6 Configuring the Binding Between a PVC and a MAC


Address
When the address binding is enabled between a PVC and a MAC address, only the packets from
the MAC address are legal and the packets from other MAC addresses are considered as illegal
and are discarded.

Context
Each PVC can be bound with one IP address and one MAC address.

Pay attention to the following points when configuring the address binding:

l The address binding is for users with static IP addresses. The address binding can be enabled
or disabled in each PVC.
l When the MAC address binding is enabled in a PVC, the packets only from the bound
MAC address are legal and the packets from other MAC addresses are considered as illegal
and are discarded.
l The system does not allow the synchronous implementation of MAC address binding and
MAC address learning. That is, when MAC address learning is enabled, MAC address
binding is disabled. When MAC address binding is enabled, MAC address learning cannot
be enabled. If you need to bind a MAC address with a PVC, disable the self-learning
function on the port. Otherwise, the system prompts an error.

After the address binding is configured, the restriction on user access is as follows:

l The services that are bound with addresses can be normally ongoing.
l If you need to delete the PVC that is bound with a MAC address, disable the address binding
first.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the mac-pvc command to set the MAC address binding for a PVC.

9-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 9 Configuring User Security

Step 2 Run the show mac-pvc command to query the MAC address binding information.

----End

Example
To set MAC address binding, do as follows:
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#mac-pvc 1a-2f-3e-4a-5f-6f 2
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#show mac-pvc all
Cid VlanId xDSL port Mac address
------ ------ --------- -------------------
2 1 0/1/1 1a-2f-3e-4a-5f-6f
----------------------------------------------
Record number: 1

Related Operation
Table 9-5 lists the related operation for configuring the binding between a PVC and a MAC
address.

Table 9-5 Related operation for configuring the binding between a PVC and a MAC address
To... Run the Command...

Query the MAC address binding show mac-pvc


information

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring QoS

10 Configuring QoS

About This Chapter

Configuring the quality of service (QoS) involves configuring the QoS priority and configuring
the queue scheduling mode.

10.1 Overview of QoS


This section describes the feature of quality of service (QoS) and its application on the
MA5105.
10.2 Configuring the Mapping Between the CoS Priority and the Queue Scheduling
The flexible mapping feature of the Class of Class (CoS) priority and the queue scheduling means
that an access device supports the flexible configuration of the mapping between the priority
and the queue. In this way, the packets with a special priority can be sent to a specified queue.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
10 Configuring QoS Configuration Guide

10.1 Overview of QoS


This section describes the feature of quality of service (QoS) and its application on the
MA5105.

Service Description

By setting different parameters of the QoS, including service availability, throughput, delay,
jitter, and loss rate, you can provide users with high quality services. Based on your requirements,
QoS processes the packets filtered by the access control list (ACL).

The system supports the 802.1p scheduling in the downstream direction. The 802.1p scheduling
decides the queue of the packets according to the preset priority threshold and the VLAN priority
of the packets in the downstream direction.

Service Specifications

The MA5105 can ensure high QoS for user services based on the traffic rule classification, traffic
statistics, and scheduling policies.

10.2 Configuring the Mapping Between the CoS Priority


and the Queue Scheduling
The flexible mapping feature of the Class of Class (CoS) priority and the queue scheduling means
that an access device supports the flexible configuration of the mapping between the priority
and the queue. In this way, the packets with a special priority can be sent to a specified queue.

Background
The flexible mapping feature of the CoS priority and the queue scheduling can meet special
requirements for service management raised by carriers. For example, if priorities 1 and 2
represent the voice service, you can map priorities 1 and 2 to queue 1 so that the voice service
can be scheduled with a higher priority.

The queue priority of the MA5105 FE port has two levels. The priority sequence is level0 <
level1. For example, if the queue priority threshold is set to 2, the system places the downstream
packets with priority 0-1 in the queue with a lower priority, and places the downstream packets
with priorities 2-7 to the queue with a higher priority. When network congestion occurs in the
downstream direction, the system schedules services based on their preset priorities.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the priority command to configure the mapping between the priority and the queue
scheduling.

Step 2 Run the show priority command to query the configured mapping.

----End

10-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 10 Configuring QoS

Example
To configure the mapping between the CoS priority and the queue scheduling, do as follows:
(config-LAN-0/0)#priority 2
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#show priority
Priority level : 2

Related Operation
Table 10-1 lists the related operation for setting the mapping between the CoS priority and the
queue scheduling.

Table 10-1 Related operation for setting the mapping between the CoS priority and the queue
scheduling
To... Run the Command...

Query the mapping between the show priority


CoS priority and the queue
scheduling

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring System Security

11 Configuring System Security

About This Chapter

Configuring the system security involves configuring an acceptable/unacceptable address


segment and configuring the source MAC address filtering.

11.1 Overview
System security setting is to prevent attacks initiated at the network or user side. This helps to
ensure the device stability.
11.2 Configuring an Accessible Address Segment
When you configure the inband NMS, make sure that the IP address of the NMS computer is in
the accessible address segment rather than in the unacceptable address segment. After the
accessible address segment is configured, the device whose IP address is in the accessible address
segment is considered to be secure and can access the system normally.
11.3 Configuring an Inaccessible Address Segment
When you need to restrict a user's authority for accessing the system, that is, to prevent the user
from accessing the system, configure an unacceptable address segment. After being added to
the unacceptable address segment, the user cannot telnet to the system.
11.4 Configuring the Source MAC Address Filtering
The system maintains a MAC address filtering table. When the source MAC address contained
in the packets of a user matches the record in the MAC address filtering table, the system filters
the packets of the user.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
11 Configuring System Security Configuration Guide

11.1 Overview
System security setting is to prevent attacks initiated at the network or user side. This helps to
ensure the device stability.

Service Description
For the related concepts of system security and the service principles, refer to chapter "System
Security" in the MA5105 Feature Description.

Service Specifications
The security features supported by the MA5105 include: MAC address filtering, and setting
accessible/unacceptable address segments.

11.2 Configuring an Accessible Address Segment


When you configure the inband NMS, make sure that the IP address of the NMS computer is in
the accessible address segment rather than in the unacceptable address segment. After the
accessible address segment is configured, the device whose IP address is in the accessible address
segment is considered to be secure and can access the system normally.

Context
l The specified protocol types include: Telnet, secure shell (SSH) and Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP).
l Each firewall can be added with up to 10 address segments.
l When one address segment is added, the first address cannot be the same as an existing
one.
l When deleting one address segment, enter only the first address of the address segment.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the atmlan ip-access command to add an acceptable address segment.
Step 2 Run the show atmlan ip-access command to query the configuration of the accessible address
segment.

----End

Example
To add an acceptable address segment from 172.16.2.11 to 172.16.2.16, do as follows:
huawei(config)#atmlan ip-access 172.16.2.11 172.16.2.16 255.255.255.0
huawei#show atmlan ip-access
Start End Mask
--------------- --------------- ---------------
172.16.2.11 172.16.2.16 255.255.252.0
--------------- ---------------- -----------------
Record number: 1

11-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 11 Configuring System Security

Related Operation
Table 11-1 lists the related operation for configuring an acceptable address segment.

Table 11-1 Related operation for configuring an acceptable address segment

To... Run the Command...

Delete an acceptable address segment no atmlan ip-access

Query the firewall configuration show atmlan ip-access

11.3 Configuring an Inaccessible Address Segment


When you need to restrict a user's authority for accessing the system, that is, to prevent the user
from accessing the system, configure an unacceptable address segment. After being added to
the unacceptable address segment, the user cannot telnet to the system.

Context
Uses in the unacceptable address segment cannot telnet to the system.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the atmlan ip-refuse command to configure an unacceptable address segment.

Step 2 Run the show atmlan ip-refuse command to query the list of unacceptable address segments.

----End

Example
To configure the unacceptable address segment from 10.11.106.11 to 10.11.106.12, do as
follows:
huawei(config)#atmlan ip-refuse 10.11.106.11 10.11.106.12 255.255.255.0
Adding refuse IP range may affect connection. Are you sure?(y/n) [n]: y
Add refused IP address successfully.
huawei(config)#show atmlan ip-refuse
Start End Mask
--------------- --------------- ---------------
172.16.2.10 172.16.2.49 255.255.255.0
--------------- ---------------- -----------------
Record number: 1

Related Operation
Table 11-2 lists the related operation for configuring an unacceptable address segment.

Table 11-2 Related operation for configuring an unacceptable address segment

To... Run the Command...

Delete an unacceptable address no atmlan ip-refuse


segment

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
11 Configuring System Security Configuration Guide

To... Run the Command...

Query the list of unacceptable address show atmlan ip-refuse


segments

11.4 Configuring the Source MAC Address Filtering


The system maintains a MAC address filtering table. When the source MAC address contained
in the packets of a user matches the record in the MAC address filtering table, the system filters
the packets of the user.

Context
The system supports the filtering of packets of up to eight MAC addresses.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface lan command to enter the LAN mode.
Step 2 Run the anti mac-spoofing command to configure the MAC address filtering.
Step 3 Run the show anti mac-spoofing command to query the MAC address configured for filtering.

----End

Example
To set address 00-11-22-33-44-55 as the MAC address for filtering, do as follows:
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#anti mac-spoofing add 00-11-22-33-44-55
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#show anti mac-spoofing

Index MAC address


----- -----------------
1 00-11-22-33-44-55
2 00-11-22-33-44-66
3 00-11-22-33-44-AA
4 00-11-22-33-44-88
6 00-11-22-33-44-00
8 00-11-22-33-44-BB
--------------------------
Total: 6

11-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 12 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service

12 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service

About This Chapter

Configuring the LAN upstream service includes the local area network (LAN) upstream service
and how to configure the service on the MA5105.

12.1 Overview of LAN


This section describes the LAN service and its related specifications. The LAN boards supported
by the
12.2 Related LAN Concepts
The related LAN concepts include tagged/untagged and auto-negotiation.
12.3 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service
This section provides the networking, data plan, configuration procedure, and operation result
to describe the application of the LAN upstream service.
12.4 Configuring the Mode of a LAN Port
Configuring the mode of a LAN port means that you need to select the tagged or untagged mode
for the LAN port. After selecting the port mode, you need to configure the auto-negotiation mode
for the port.
12.5 Configuring a Service VLAN
After a service VLAN is configured, you can set up the PVC of a LAN board to realize the LAN
upstream service.
12.6 Configuring Subtending Levels and the Forwarding Range
When the MA5105 is subtended, you need to configure the subtending levels and the forwarding
range (full forwarding or forwarding by VLAN range).
12.7 Configuring Traffic Suppression
Configuring the traffic suppression can restrict broadcast frames and unknown unicast frames
to a certain extent, thus ensuring the normal running of services.
12.8 Configuring the Loopback of a LAN Port
The loopback of a LAN port includes logic loopback, PHY loopback, and UTOPIA loopback.
Configuring the loopback of a LAN port will interrupt services.
12.9 Disabling the LAN Port

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
12 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service Configuration Guide

After being disabled, the LAN port cannot transmit services. The services transmitted over the
port will be interrupted.
12.10 Disabling the UTOPIA Port
By disabling the UTOPIA port in LAN upstream transmission, you can prohibit services when
you locate a fault or a port owes fees. After the UTOPIA port is disabled, the ADSL services
corresponding to the port are interrupted.

12-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 12 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service

12.1 Overview of LAN


This section describes the LAN service and its related specifications. The LAN boards supported
by the

Service Description

The LAN boards supported by the MA5105 include the MFCE, MFCS, and MFCM boards. The
three boards provide two FE ports respectively, as shown in Table 12-1.

Table 12-1 LAN boards supported by the MA5105

Name Functions and Ports

MFCE It is a board with the uplink electrical port and is used for system control and
Ethernet upstream subtending. It provides one 100Base-FX uplink subtening
port.

MFCS It is a board with the single-mode optical port and is used for system control
and Ethernet upstream subtending. It provides one 100Base-FX uplink
subtening port. The transmission distance is 15 km.

MFCM It is a board with the multi-mode optical port and is used for system control
and Ethernet upstream subtending. It provides one 100Base-FX uplink
subtening port. The transmission distance is 2 km.

For the concepts of the LAN and the service principles, refer to the chapter "VLAN" in the
MA5105 Feature Description.

Service Specifications

When receiving packets, the LAN port processes the packets in the same way irrespective of in
tagged mode or in untagged mode. That is, if the packets do not contain a VLAN, the default
VLAN of the port is added to the packets. If the packets contain VLAN, the port directly receives
and processes the packets.

When sending packets, the processing methods in tagged mode and untagged mode are different:
l When the port works in tagged mode: If the default VLAN ID of the port is equal to the
VLAN ID contained in the packets to be sent, the VLAN tag is removed from the packets.
If the default VLAN ID of the port is not equal to the VLAN ID contained in the packets,
the packets with the VLAN ID are sent out, thus realizing transparent transmission of
VLAN.
l When the port works in untagged mode, no matter what is the default VLAN ID and whether
it is equal to that contained in the packets to be sent, the VLAN tag is removed from the
packets.

The MA5105 supports up to three levels of subtending (four devices in total). Figure 12-1 shows
the subtending configuration of the MA5105.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
12 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service Configuration Guide

Figure 12-1 Subtending configuration of the MA5105

Upstream

Uplink board
xDSL
xDSL

First level
Uplink board
xDSL
xDSL

In FE subtending, the subtended ports must be consistent with each other. If you need to set up
a subtending between an electrical port and an optical port, an O/E converter is required.

12.2 Related LAN Concepts


The related LAN concepts include tagged/untagged and auto-negotiation.

Tagged/Untagged
The Ethernet port supports the tagged and untagged modes. In an actual networking, make sure
that the mode of the Ethernet port is the same as that of the peer device to ensure the normal
running of services.
In tagged mode:
l In the data receiving process, if the packet does not carry any VLAN, the Ethernet port
adds the default VLAN of the port to the packet. If the packet carries the VLAN, the Ethernet
port directly receives and handles the packet.
l In the data sending process, if the default VLAN ID of the port is equal to the VLAN ID
contained in the packet to be sent, the VLAN tag is removed from the packet. If the default
VLAN ID of the port does not equal the VLAN ID contained in the packet to be sent, the
Ethernet port sends the packet containing its own VLAN ID to implement the transparent
transmission of the VLAN.
In untagged mode:
l In the data receiving process, if the packet does not carry any VLAN, the Ethernet port
adds the default VLAN of the port to the packet. If the packet carries the VLAN, the Ethernet
port directly receives and handles the packet.
l In the data sending process, the Ethernet port deletes the VLAN tag from the packet to be
sent irrespective of what the default VLAN of the port is or whether the default VLAN of
the port equals the VLAN contained in the packet.

Auto-negotiation
Auto-negotiation refers to the process in which an Ethernet port negotiates with the
interconnected Ethernet port through the standard physical layer signal FLP (for FAST Ethernet)

12-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 12 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service

or NLP( for Ethernet), and then the working rates of the two Ethernet ports are automatically
set to the highest one supported by both of them. For example, after a 10 Mbit/s Ethernet port
negotiates with a 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s Ethernet port, the working rates of them are 10 Mbit/s.

12.3 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service


This section provides the networking, data plan, configuration procedure, and operation result
to describe the application of the LAN upstream service.

Networking

Data Plan

Prerequisite

Background

Flowchart
Figure 12-2 shows the networking for configuring the LAN upstream service.

Figure 12-2 Networking for configuring the LAN upstream service


MFCE

Table 12-2 lists the data plan for configuring the LAN upstream service.

Table 12-2 Data plan for the configuring the LAN upstream service

Item Data

MA5105_A FE port modes: tagged, 100 M, and full duplex

VLAN ID: 10

Forwarded VLAN range: 20-35

User port: 0/1/1, VPI/VCI: 0/35

Traffic profile rate: 4096 kbit/s

MA5105_B FE port modes: tagged, 100 M, and full duplex

VLAN ID: 25

User port: 0/1/1, VPI/VCI: 0/35

Check the board state. Before configuring the data, make sure that the board state is in the normal
state.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
12 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service Configuration Guide

MA5105_A subtends MA5105_B through the MFCE board. MA5105_A is connected upstream
with the MA5100.

Figure 12-3 shows the flowchart for configuring the VLAN upstream service.

Figure 12-3 Flowchart for configuring the LAN upstream service

Start

Set the FE port mode

Set a VLAN

Set the subtending levels

Se the range of forwarded


VLANs

Configure xDSL

Set the traffic profile

Set up a PVC

End

NOTE

l The VLAN ID of the subtended lower level MA5105 must be within the range of VLAN IDs allocated
by the upper level MA5105.
l Before configuring the traffic parameters, run the show traffic-profile command to check whether the
required parameter exists in the traffic entry. If no traffic profile exists, run the traffic-profile command
to add one.

Procedure
Step 1 Set the LAN port mode.
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#port mode tagged non-negotiate full-duplex 100m
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#exit
huawei(config)#

12-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 12 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service

Step 2 Set the inband NMS VLAN and service VLAN.


huawei(config)#nms 1
Are you sure to set the inband VLAN to 1? (y/n) [n]:y
Set inband VLAN successfully.
huawei(config)#interface lan 0/0
huawei(config-LAN-)#vlan
<vlanId>{1-4095}:10
Add VLAN successfully, VLANID = 10.

Step 3 Set the subtending layer.


huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#cascade
{forward,number}:number
<num>{0-3}:1
Set cascading number successfully.

Step 4 Configure xDSL.


For how to configure the xDSL line profile and xDSL alarm profile, how to activate the xDSL
port and how to bind the xDSL alarm profile, see "15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service" and
"16 Configuring the SHDSL Service."
This section takes the ADSL access as an example.

Step 5 Set the traffic profile.


huawei(config)#traffic-profile 4096 5

Step 6 Set up a PVC.


huawei(config)#pvc
{adsl,shdsl,lan}:adsl
<FrameId/SlotId/PortId>{(0)/(1-2)/(1-16)}:0/1/1
{<vpi>}{0-127}:0
{<vci>}{32-127}:35
{adsl,shdsl,lan}:lan
<FrameId/SlotId>{(0)/(0-2)}:0/0
{untagged,tagged}:tagged
<vlanId>{1-4095}:10
{1483b}:1483b
<priority>{0-7}:1
<rx-car>{off,on}[on]:on
<tx-car>{off,on}[on]:on
<rx-cttr>{1-20}:5
<tx-cttr>{1-20}:5
Add PVC successfully, CID = 1.

Step 7 Save the data.


huawei(config)#save

----End

Result
PCs can access the IP networks. The configured PVC information can be queried from the NMS.

12.4 Configuring the Mode of a LAN Port


Configuring the mode of a LAN port means that you need to select the tagged or untagged mode
for the LAN port. After selecting the port mode, you need to configure the auto-negotiation mode
for the port.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
12 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service Configuration Guide

Context
l When the auto-negotiation function is enabled on the port, the full duplex communication
mode and the rate of the port and the interconnected port are decided by the negotiation
result. When the port is set as non-negotiate, you need to set the communication mode and
rate for the port.
l When you configure the auto-negotiation function, make sure that both network ports
support the auto-negotiation function.
l Pay attention to the following points when setting the LAN port mode:
– A subtending port is responsible for data forwarding only in system subtending. It does
not support the setting of the port mode.
– When you set the auto-negotiation function, both the port and the interconnected port
must be auto-negotiable.
– The FE optical port does not support auto-negotiation. Therefore, you need to set it as
non-negotiate.

Procedure
Figure 12-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the LAN port mode.

Figure 12-4 Flowchart for configuring the LAN port mode

Run the command


port mode
Select a working mode
<taggedmode>{tagged,untagged}
tagged/untagged
Select a negotiation mode

{negotiate,non-negotiate}:negotiate {negotiate,non-negotiate}:non-negotiate

Select full duplex

End <full-duplex>:full-duplex

Select a rate
<speed>

End

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface lan command to enter the LAN mode.
Step 2 Run the port mode command to set the mode of an Ethernet uplink port.

----End

12-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 12 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service

Example
To set the mode of an FE port as tagged and its communication mode as full duplex and auto-
negotiation, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface lan 0/0
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#port mode
<tagged-mode>{tagged,untagged}:tagged
{negotiate,non-negotiate}:negotiate
{full-duplex}:full-duplex
<speed>{10m,100m}:100m
Set successfully

Related Operation
Table 12-3 shows the related operation for configuring the LAN port mode.

Table 12-3 Related operation for configuring the LAN port mode

To... Run the Remarks


Command...

Enter the LAN mode interface lan You can run this command to enter the
LAN mode and then perform the related
operation.

Deactivate the LAN port shutdown port -

12.5 Configuring a Service VLAN


After a service VLAN is configured, you can set up the PVC of a LAN board to realize the LAN
upstream service.

Context
The system supports 128 service VLANs.

NOTE

Pay attention to the following points when configuring a service VLAN:


l The ID of a VLAN is unique. When the ID of a VLAN is the same as an exiting one, the system prompts
an error.
l If some VLAN IDs are used by PVCs, run the no pvc command to delete the related PVCs and then you
can delete the VLAN.
l Before setting a VLAN, switch an FE port to the tagged mode.
l In tagged mode, the PVC related to a VLAN is set up based on the VLAN ID. Namely, the PVC from an
xDSL port to the VLAN ID.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface lan command to enter the LAN mode.

Step 2 Run the vlan command to set a service VLAN.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
12 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service Configuration Guide

Step 3 Run the show vlan command to query the information about the configured VLAN.

----End

Example
To add VLAN 60, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface lan 0/0
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#vlan
<vlanId>{1-4095}:60
Add VLAN successfully, VLANID = 60.
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)show vlan
[<frameId>]{0-0}:0
Frame Id Vlan Id Vlan Index Unicast Use count Multicast Use count
-------- ------- ---------- ------------------ -------------------
0 60 2 0 0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Record number: 1

Related Operation
Table 12-4 lists the related operation for configuring a service VLAN.

Table 12-4 Related operation for configuring a service VLAN


To... Run the Remarks
Command...

Enter the LAN interface lan You can run this command to enter the LAN
mode mode and then perform the related operation.

Query the show vlan This command is used for querying:


information about l VLAN ID and VLAN index
the configured
VLAN l Unicast service counts and multicast service
counts
l VLAN attribute and inner VLAN ID

12.6 Configuring Subtending Levels and the Forwarding


Range
When the MA5105 is subtended, you need to configure the subtending levels and the forwarding
range (full forwarding or forwarding by VLAN range).

Context
For the related concepts of subtending and the service principles, see "Subtending Networking
" in the MA5105 Feature Description.

Context
You can set the subtending levels based on the number of subtended devices.
You can set the forwarding range based on the working mode of a LAN port:

12-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 12 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service

l In tagged mode, you can set the range of VLANs for the forwarding of the packet carrying
VLANs, or you can set the parameter all to set that all the packets are forwarded.
l In untagged mode, you can only set the parameter all to set that all the packets are forwarded.

Run the cascade command to set the subtending levels and the forwarding range. Run the no
cascade forward command to delete the forwarding range.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the cascade command to configure the subtending levels and the forwarding range.
Step 2 Run the show cascade command to query the configured subtending levels and the forwarding
range.

----End

Example
To set the subtending levels and the forwarding range of VLANs for a FE port, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface lan 0/0
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#cascade forward vlan 10 12
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#show cascade
Cascading forward VLANs:
Start VLAN End VLAN
-------------- -------------
5 8
10 12
-------------- -------------
Record number: 2
Cascading number: 0

Related Operation
Table 12-5 lists the related operation for configuring the type of outer Ethernet frames.

Table 12-5 Related operation for configuring the type of outer Ethernet frames
To... Run the Command...

Query the information about the show cascade


configured type of outer Ethernet
frames

Delete the forwarding range of no cascade


VLANs

12.7 Configuring Traffic Suppression


Configuring the traffic suppression can restrict broadcast frames and unknown unicast frames
to a certain extent, thus ensuring the normal running of services.

Context
When there are too many broadcast frames and unknown unicast frames, the port bandwidth is
badly occupied and normal services are affected. With the traffic suppression enabled, the

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
12 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service Configuration Guide

broadcast frames and unknown unicast frames can be restricted to a certain extent, thus ensuring
the normal running of the services.
By default, the index of the current traffic suppression for broadcast frames is 16. The index of
the current traffic suppression for unknown unicast frames is 4. Broadcast frames are not
suppressed by default. Unknown unicast frames are partially suppressed. The suppression degree
is 10 frames per second.
The system restricts the traffic of broadcast and unknown unicast on the FE board. In this way,
the system can effectively prevent the malicious attack caused by unknown users and the network
congestion caused by large amount of broadcast.
By default, there are 16 traffic suppression levels. When you set the traffic suppression, select
a level from the 16 traffic suppression levels.
Pay attention to the following points when you set the traffic suppression:
l The suppression is valid only for the traffic from a LAN port to an ADSL port.
l The suppression cannot be enabled for a PVC. It can be enabled for a whole LAN port.
l Since broadcast frames play a certain role in system running, do not completely suppress
the broadcast frames.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the traffic-suppress command to set the traffic suppression for broadcast frames and
unknown unicast frames.
Step 2 Run the show traffic-suppress command to query the traffic suppression indexes for the
broadcast frames and unknown unicast frames.

----End

Example
To set the traffic suppression for broadcast frames, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface lan 0/0
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#traffic-suppress broadcast 10
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#show traffic-suppress
Traffic suppression ID definition:
NO. Min bandwidth(kbps) Max bandwidth(kbps) Package number(pps)
---- -------------------- -------------------- -------------------
1 0 0 0
2 1 23 2
3 2 59 5
4 5 118 10
5 8 189 16
6 12 284 24
7 16 379 32
8 24 569 48
9 32 759 64
10 48 1138 96
11 64 1518 128
12 128 3036 256
13 256 6072 512
14 512 12144 1024
15 1023 24276 2047
16 MAX MAX MAX
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Current traffic suppression ID of broadcast :10
Current traffic suppression ID of unknown-cast:16

12-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 12 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service

Related Operation
Table 12-6 lists the related operation for configuring the traffic suppression.

Table 12-6 Related operation for configuring the traffic suppression

To... Run the Command...

Query the traffic suppression indexes for show traffic-suppress


the broadcast frames and unknown
unicast frames

12.8 Configuring the Loopback of a LAN Port


The loopback of a LAN port includes logic loopback, PHY loopback, and UTOPIA loopback.
Configuring the loopback of a LAN port will interrupt services.

12.8.1 Configuring the Logic Loopback


By configuring the logic loopback of a LAN port, you can judge the correctness of the logic.
After the logic loopback is configured successfully, the normal service will be interrupted.
12.8.2 Configuring the PHY loopback
By configuring the PHY loopback of the LAN port, you can judge whether the port or line works
in the normal state. After the PHY loopback is configured successfully, the normal service will
be interrupted.
12.8.3 Configuring the UTOPIA Loopback
By configuring the UTOPIA loopback of a LAN port, you can judge whether the ADSL2+ port
works in the normal state. After the UTOPIA loopback is configured successfully, the normal
service will be interrupted.

12.8.1 Configuring the Logic Loopback


By configuring the logic loopback of a LAN port, you can judge the correctness of the logic.
After the logic loopback is configured successfully, the normal service will be interrupted.

Context
By default, all the loopbacks are disabled when the system starts. When the system data is saved,
the loopback settings are not saved. The logic loopback and the UTOPIA loopback cannot exist
at the same time.

CAUTION
The loopback operation interrupts services. Exercise caution when performing the operation.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface lan command to enter the LAN mode.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
12 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service Configuration Guide

Step 2 Run the loopback logic command to configure the logic loopback.

----End

Example
To configure the local loopback of the uplink port, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface lan 0/0
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#loopback logic
{uplink-local,downlink-local,remote}:uplink-local
Are you sure to set logic uplink local loopback? (y/n) [n]:y
Set FE logic uplink local loopback successfully.

Related Operation
Table 12-7 lists the related operation for configuring the logic loopback.

Table 12-7 Related operation for configuring the logic loopback

To... Run the Command...

Configure the PHY loopback loopback phy

Configure the UTOPIA loopback loopback utopia

Cancel the logic loopback no loopback logic

12.8.2 Configuring the PHY loopback


By configuring the PHY loopback of the LAN port, you can judge whether the port or line works
in the normal state. After the PHY loopback is configured successfully, the normal service will
be interrupted.

Context
By default, all the loopbacks are disabled when the system starts. When the system data is saved,
the loopback settings are not saved.

CAUTION
The loopback operation interrupts services. Exercise caution when performing the operation.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface lan command to enter the LAN mode.

Step 2 Run the loopback phy command to configure the PHY loopback.

----End

12-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 12 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service

Example
To configure the PHY loopback of the uplink optical port, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface lan 0/0
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#loopback phy
{uplink-local,downlink-local}:uplink-local
Are you sure to set PHY uplink local loopback? (y/n) [n]:y

Related Operation
Table 12-8 lists the related operation for configuring the PHY loopback.

Table 12-8 Related operation for configuring the PHY loopback


To... Run the Command...

Cancel the PHY loopback no loopback phy

Cancel the UTOPIA loopback loopback utopia

Configure the logic loopback loopback logic

12.8.3 Configuring the UTOPIA Loopback


By configuring the UTOPIA loopback of a LAN port, you can judge whether the ADSL2+ port
works in the normal state. After the UTOPIA loopback is configured successfully, the normal
service will be interrupted.

Context
By default, all the loopbacks are disabled when the system starts. When the system data is saved,
the loopback settings are not saved. The logic loopback and the UTOPIA loopback cannot exist
at the same time.

CAUTION
The loopback operation interrupts services. Exercise caution when performing the operation.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface lan command to enter the LAN mode.
Step 2 Run the loopback utopia command to configure the UTOPIA loopback.

----End

Example
To configure the UTOPIA local loopback, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface lan 0/0
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#loopback utopia

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
12 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service Configuration Guide

{local,remote}:local
Are you sure to set Utopia local loopback? (y/n) [n]:y
Set Utopia local loopback successfully.

Related Operation
Table 12-9 lists the related operation for configuring the UTOPIA loopback.

Table 12-9 Related operation for configuring the UTOPIA loopback


To... Run the Command...

Cancel the UTOPIA loopback no loopback utopia

Configuring the PHY loopback loopback phy

Configure the logic loopback loopback logic

12.9 Disabling the LAN Port


After being disabled, the LAN port cannot transmit services. The services transmitted over the
port will be interrupted.

Context
By default, the LAN port is enabled when the system starts. When saving the configuration data,
the system does not save the settings when the LAN port is disabled.

CAUTION
After the LAN port is disabled, the services are interrupted. Perform this operation with caution.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface lan command to enter the LAN mode.
Step 2 Run the shutdown port command to disable the LAN port.
Step 3 Run the show board command to query the port status (state entry).

----End

Example
To disable the LAN port, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface lan 0/0
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#shutdown port
{uplink,downlink}:downlink
Are you sure to shutdown downlink?(y/n) [n]:y
huawei(config)#show board
[<frameId[/slotId]>]{(0)[/(0-4)]}:0/1
Frame Slot Board Type Board State Interface Type PVC Number
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------

12-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 12 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service

0 1 MFEA Online - 0
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------

Port State LineProfileId AlarmProfileId ExtLineProfileId


---- ------------ ------------- -------------- ----------------
1 deActivated 33 1 -
2 deActivated 33 1 -
3 deActivated 33 1 -
4 deActivated 33 1 -
5 deActivated 33 1 -
6 deActivated 33 1 -
---------------------------------------------------------------------

Related Operation
Table 12-10 lists the related operation for disabling the LAN port.

Table 12-10 Related operation for disabling the LAN port

To... Run the Command...

Enable the LAN port no shutdown port

Query the port status show board

12.10 Disabling the UTOPIA Port


By disabling the UTOPIA port in LAN upstream transmission, you can prohibit services when
you locate a fault or a port owes fees. After the UTOPIA port is disabled, the ADSL services
corresponding to the port are interrupted.

Context
By default, the UTOPIA port is enabled when the system starts. When saving the configuration
data, the system does not save the settings when the UTOPIA port of the FE board is disabled.

CAUTION
Disabling the UTOPIA port interrupts services. Exercise caution when performing the operation.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface lan command to enter the LAN mode.

Step 2 Run the shutdown utopia-port command to disable the UTOPIA port.

Step 3 Run the show board command to query the status of the UTOPIA port.

----End

Example
To configure the UTOPIA local loopback, do as follows:

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12-17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
12 Configuring the LAN Upstream Service Configuration Guide

huawei(config)#interface lan 0/0


huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#shutdown utopia-port
<portid>{1-32}:1
Are you sure to shutdown?(y/n) [n]:y
Shutdown Utopia port successfully.
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#show board 0/0
....................
xDSL's utopia port state: O --- open, C --- close
--------------------------------------------------------------
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
C O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
--------------------------------------------------------------
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
--------------------------------------------------------------
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Related Operation
Table 12-11 lists the related operation for disabling the UTOPIA port.

Table 12-11 Related operation for disabling the UTOPIA port


To... Run the Command...

Enable the UTOPIA port no shutdown utopia-port

Query the information about a specified show board


board

12-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 13 Configuring IMA Upstream Transmission

13 Configuring IMA Upstream


Transmission

About This Chapter

Configuring the IMA upstream transmission involves the configuration example of the IMA
upstream transmission on the MA5105, adding an IMA group, enabling the CRC4 function of
an IMA group, enabling the scramble function of an IMA group, and adding an IMA link.

13.1 Overview of the IMA Upstream Service


Inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) is a technology of demultiplexing ATM integration cells
to multiple low-speed links and then multiplexing the low-speed links at the remote side to
restore the original integration cells. In this way, the multiple low-speed links can be multiplexed
flexibly and conveniently.
13.2 Configuration Example of the IMA Upstream Service
This section provides the networking, data plan, configuration procedure, and operation result
to describe the application of the service upstream transmission over the IMA board on the
MA5105.
13.3 Adding an IMA Group
Since the IMA upstream transmission is based on IMA groups, setting IMA groups is the
prerequisite for implementing the IMA upstream transmission. The system supports only one
IMA group.
13.4 Enabling the CRC4 Function of an IMA Group
The CRC4 function is the cyclic redundancy check function. After the CRC4 function of an IMA
group is enabled, you can check the correctness of the transmitted and received frames. The
settings of the CRC4 function of the IMA group must be the same as the settings of the IMA
interface of the interconnected device. Otherwise, a link fails.
13.5 Enabling the Scramble Function of an IMA Group
The scramble function of an IMA group is an anti-interference method of the IMA group.
Enabling the scramble function of the IMA group can improve the anti-interference capability
of the device. The settings of the scramble function must be the same as the settings of the IMA
interface of the inconnected device. Otherwise, a link fails.
13.6 Adding an IMA Link

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
13 Configuring IMA Upstream Transmission Configuration Guide

After an IMA link is added to the IMA group, the system can work in the normal state. The
prerequisite for adding the IMA link is that an IMA group already exists.
13.7 Enabling the Auto Reset Function of an IMA Group
If the ID of an IMA link changes (for example, the cables for ports 1 and 2 are connected to
ports 2 and 3), or the ID of an IMA group changes (for example, the IMA group of the upper
layer device changes), you can manually reset the IMA group to resume the services or enable
the auto reset function of the IMA group to resume the services.
13.8 Disabling the UTOPIA Port
Disabling the UTOPIA port in IMA upstream transmission can prohibit services when you locate
a fault or a port owes fees. After the UTOPIA port is disabled, the services corresponding to the
port are interrupted.
13.9 Configuring the IMA Loopback
Configuring the IMA loopback involves configuring the line interface unit (LIU) loopback and
configuring the logic loopback. Configuring the IMA loopback interrupts services.

13-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 13 Configuring IMA Upstream Transmission

13.1 Overview of the IMA Upstream Service


Inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) is a technology of demultiplexing ATM integration cells
to multiple low-speed links and then multiplexing the low-speed links at the remote side to
restore the original integration cells. In this way, the multiple low-speed links can be multiplexed
flexibly and conveniently.

Service Specifications
The MA5105 provides the E1 IMA upstream service through the MIMA board, thus realizing
the transmission of ATM broadband data through the existing E1 lines.
The MIMA board provides four E1 IMA ports. Each port supports the broadband of 2 Mbit/s.

13.2 Configuration Example of the IMA Upstream Service


This section provides the networking, data plan, configuration procedure, and operation result
to describe the application of the service upstream transmission over the IMA board on the
MA5105.

Networking

Flowchart
l The system supports up to 16 routes. When a route is no longer in use, delete it to reduce
the load of the system.
l After receiving an IP packet, the system checks the source IP address and the system firewall
list. If the IP address is not acceptable, the system directly discards the packet sent from
the IP address. If the IP address is acceptable, the system checks the destination IP address
and the IP address of the device. If the two IP addresses are consistent, the system receives
the packet and processes it.
l When returning a packet, the system checks whether the destination IP address is in the
same subnet as the IP address of the device. When the two IP addresses are not in the same
subnet, the system checks the sytem routing table, ANDs the destination IP address with
the subnet mask in the route entry. If the result is consistent with the destination IP address,
the system forwards the packet to the corresponding gateway.
l Typically, an ADSL line profile is used to activate the ADSL port. Line profiles 1 and 33
are default profiles. You do not need to add them. The index of an ADSL line profile can
be manually added by the user or automatically assigned by the system.
Figure 13-1 shows the networking for configuring the IMA upstream transmission.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
13 Configuring IMA Upstream Transmission Configuration Guide

Figure 13-1 Networking for configuring the IMA upstream transmission

Start

Configure the IMA group and the IMA link

Configure the working mode of the IMA


port

Configure the IP address of the device

Configure the system route

Configure an accessible IP address

Configure the inband NMS PVC

Configure the ADSL2+ line profile

Activate the ADSL port

Set up a service PVC

End

Table 13-1 lists the data plan for configuring the IMA upstream transmission.

13-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 13 Configuring IMA Upstream Transmission

Table 13-1 Data plan for configuring the IMA upstream transmission
Item Data

MA5105 IP address: 10.18.18.1


Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Downlink port of IP address: 10.18.18.254


the router Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

NMS PVC Connection type: ATM-NMS


Port connecting to the device: 0/0/1
VPI/VCI: 0/100

Service PVC Connection type: ATM-ADSL


Port: 0/0/1–0/1/1
VPI/VCI: 0/32, 0/35

NMS terminal IP address: 202.103.222.14


Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Figure 13-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the IMA upstream transmission.

Figure 13-2 Flowchart for configuring the IMA upstream transmission

MA5100 Router

Modem
Modem
MA5105

ADSL users
ADSL users

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the IMA group and IMA link.
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#group add
<groupId>{1-1}:1
<version1.0|version1.1>{version1.0,version1.1}:version1.1
<minTxLinks>{1-4}:1
<minRxLinks>{1-4}:1
<imaId>{0-255}:0
<frameLength>{32,64,128,256}:128
[<alpha>]{1-2}[2]:2

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
13 Configuring IMA Upstream Transmission Configuration Guide

[<beta>]{1-5}[2]:2
[<gamma>]{1-5}[1]:1
Add IMA group successfully.

Step 2 Configure the port working mode.


huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#no crc4
<groupid>{1-1}:1
Are you sure to cancel crc4?(y/n) [n]:y
Cancel CRC4 successfully.
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#no scramble
<groupId>{1-1}:1
Are you sure to cancel scramble?(y/n) [n]:y
Cancel scramble successfully.

Step 3 Set the IP address of the device.


huawei(config)#atmlan ip-address atm
<ip-addr>:10.18.18.1
<netmask>:255.255.255.0
Set successfully.

Step 4 Configure xDSL.

For how to configure the xDSL line profile and xDSL alarm profile, how to activate the xDSL
port and how to bind the xDSL alarm profile, see "15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service" and
"16 Configuring the SHDSL Service."

This section takes the ADSL access as an example.

Step 5 Set up a service PVC.


huawei(config)#pvc
{adsl,shdsl,atm,nms}:adsl
<FrameId/SlotId/PortId>{(0)/(1-2)/(1-16)}:0/1/1
{<vpi>}{0-31}:0
{<vci>}{32-127}:35
{adsl,shdsl,atm,nms}:atm
<FrameId/SlotId/PortId>{(0)/(0)/(1-1)}:0/0/1
{<vpi>}{0-255}:0
{<vci>}{32-1023}:32
<rx-cttr>{1-50}:1
<tx-cttr>{1-50}:1
<rx-UPC>{off,on}[off]:off
<tx-UPC>{off,on}[off]:off
add PVC successfully. CID = 2.

----End

Result
After the configuration, PCs can access the Internet.

13.3 Adding an IMA Group


Since the IMA upstream transmission is based on IMA groups, setting IMA groups is the
prerequisite for implementing the IMA upstream transmission. The system supports only one
IMA group.

Context
l The MIMA board supports one IMA group. The IMA group has a unique index and a unique
ID. The index of the IMA group can be only 1. The ID of the IMA group ranges from 0 to
255.

13-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 13 Configuring IMA Upstream Transmission

Note:
l After the data (such as IMA frame length, IMA ID, and IMA version number) of an IMA
group is changed, you need to run the reset group command to reset the IMA group.
l The version number of an IMA group must be the same as that of the peer end.
l In an IMA group, the send links must be equal to the receive links.
l "framelength" means the number of cells contained in an IMA frame. It must be the same
as that of the peer end. "framelength" can be 32, 64, 128, or 256. It is recommended to use
128.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the group add command to add an IMA group.
Step 2 Run the show group parameter command to query the parameter about an IMA group.

----End

Example
To add an IMA group, do as follows:
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#group add 1 version1.0
<minTxLinks>{1-4}:4
<minRxLinks>{1-4}:4
<imaId>{0-255}:10
<frameLength>{32,64,128,256}:128
[<alpha>]{1-2}[2]:2
[<beta>]{1-5}[2]:2
[<gamma>]{1-5}[1]:1
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#show group parameter
<groupId>{1-1}:1
NE group symmetry : Symmetrical Configuration and Operation
FE group symmetry : Symmetrical Configuration and Operation
Available minimum Tx links: 4
Available minimum Rx links: 4
NE clock mode : ITC
FE clock mode : CTC
Tx reference link index : 1
Rx reference link index : 1
Tx IMA ID : 10
Rx IMA ID : 10
Tx framelength : 128
Rx framelength : 128
Maximum differential delay among the links(ms): 344
Alpha value : 2
Beta value : 2
Gamma value : 1
Tx protocol version : Version 1.1
Rx protocol version : Version 1.1

Related Operation
Table 13-2 lists the related operation for adding an IMA group.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
13 Configuring IMA Upstream Transmission Configuration Guide

Table 13-2 Related operation for adding an IMA group


To... Run the Command...

Delete an IMA group group delete

Query the parameter information about show group parameter


an IMA group

Query the invalid state information about show group fail-state


an IMA group

Query the performance state information show group performance state


about an IMA group

13.4 Enabling the CRC4 Function of an IMA Group


The CRC4 function is the cyclic redundancy check function. After the CRC4 function of an IMA
group is enabled, you can check the correctness of the transmitted and received frames. The
settings of the CRC4 function of the IMA group must be the same as the settings of the IMA
interface of the interconnected device. Otherwise, a link fails.

Context
When configuring the IMA group mode, pay attention to the following points:
l Configuring the IMA group mode involves setting the CRC4 function and setting the
scramble function.
l When the settings of an IMA group is correct, and the settings of the CRC4 function and
the scramble function are the same as that of the peer device, the Link LED (green) is on.
If the Link LED is off, the possible causes are: The line is not in the normal state, or the
IMA settings at both ends of the line are not the same.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the crc4 command to enable the CRC4 function.
Step 2 Run the show board command to query the attribute of an IMA group.

----End

Example
To enable the CRC4 function, do as follows:
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#crc4 1
Are you sure to set crc4(y/n) [n]:y
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#show board 0/0
Frame Slot Board Type Board State Subboard Type PVC Number
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------
0 0 IMA Normal H521APCA 1
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------

IMA state:
----------
GroupId Block Loopback Scramble CRC4 AutoReset Switch
------- -------- ------------ -------- ---- ----------------

13-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 13 Configuring IMA Upstream Transmission

1 No No loopback No Yes Off


------- -------- ------------ -------- ---- ----------------
LinkId Tx Block Rx Block
------ ------------ ------------
1 No No
2 No No
3 No No
4 No No
------ ------------ ------------

E1 alarm state:
---------------
PORT LOS LFA RRA LMFA AIS CRC4
---- ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------

Related Operation
Table 13-3 lists the related operation for enabling the CRC4 function of an IMA group.

Table 13-3 Related operation for enabling the CRC4 function of an IMA group

To... Run the Command...

Query the attribute of an IMA group show board

Disable the CRC4 function no crc4

13.5 Enabling the Scramble Function of an IMA Group


The scramble function of an IMA group is an anti-interference method of the IMA group.
Enabling the scramble function of the IMA group can improve the anti-interference capability
of the device. The settings of the scramble function must be the same as the settings of the IMA
interface of the inconnected device. Otherwise, a link fails.

Context
When configuring the IMA group mode, pay attention to the following points:
l Configuring the IMA group mode involves setting the CRC4 function and setting the
scramble function.
l When the settings of an IMA group is correct, and the settings of the CRC4 function and
the scramble function are the same as those of the peer device, the Link LED (green) is on.
If the Link LED is off, the possible causes are: The line is not in the normal state, or the
IMA settings at both ends of the line are not the same.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the scramble command to enable the scramble function.
Step 2 Run the show board command to query the attribute of an IMA group.

----End

Example
To enable the scramble function, do as follows:

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
13 Configuring IMA Upstream Transmission Configuration Guide

huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#scramble 1
Are you sure to set scramble?(y/n) [n]:y
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#show board 0/0
Frame Slot Board Type Board State Subboard Type PVC Number
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------
0 0 IMA Normal H521APCA 1
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------

IMA state:
----------
GroupId Block Loopback Scramble CRC4 AutoReset Switch
------- -------- ------------ -------- ---- ----------------
1 No No loopback Yes No Off
------- -------- ------------ -------- ---- ----------------
LinkId Tx Block Rx Block
------ ------------ ------------
1 No No
2 No No
3 No No
4 No No
------ ------------ ------------

Related Operation
Table 13-4 lists the related operation for enabling the scramble function.

Table 13-4 Related operation for enabling the scramble function

To... Run the Command...

Query the attribute of an IMA group show board

Disable the scramble function no scramble

13.6 Adding an IMA Link


After an IMA link is added to the IMA group, the system can work in the normal state. The
prerequisite for adding the IMA link is that an IMA group already exists.

Context
l The IMA link supports the symmetric working mode. The connection of the IMA interface
on the local device must match that of the peer device. That is, the Tx of the local device
must be connected to the Rx of the peer device and the Ry of the local device must be
connected to the Ty of the peer device. "x" and "y" indicate the link numbers.
l An IMA group can be configured with four links. The range of the link numbers is 1–4.

When adding or deleting an IMA link, pay attention that:

If you need to delete an IMA link from one IMA group and add the link to another IMA group,
make sure that the link is deleted from both the local device and the peer device. Then you can
add the link to another IMA group. Otherwise, the local device does not match the peer device,
thus affecting the running of the IMA group.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the link add command to add an IMA link.

13-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 13 Configuring IMA Upstream Transmission

Step 2 Run the show link parameter command to query the information, including: IMA link number,
ID of the send link, and the ID of the receive link.

----End

Example
To add an IMA link, do as follows:
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#link add 1 1
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#show link parameter
IMA link index: 1
Tx link ID : 0
Rx link ID : 0

Related Operation
Table 13-5 lists the related operation for adding an IMA link.

Table 13-5 Related operation for adding an IMA link

To... Run the Command...

Delete an IMA link link delete

Block an IMA link link block

Unblock an IMA link no link block

Query the information about an IMA link show link parameter

13.7 Enabling the Auto Reset Function of an IMA Group


If the ID of an IMA link changes (for example, the cables for ports 1 and 2 are connected to
ports 2 and 3), or the ID of an IMA group changes (for example, the IMA group of the upper
layer device changes), you can manually reset the IMA group to resume the services or enable
the auto reset function of the IMA group to resume the services.

Context
l The MA5105 supports the manual reset function of an IMA group. When the ID of an IMA
link or that of an IMA group changes, you can run the reset group command to reset the
MA5105 IMA group to resume the services.
l The MA5105 supports the auto reset function of an IMA group. Run the ima autoreset
command to enable the auto reset function of the IMA group. When the ID of an IMA link
or that of an IMA group changes, the IMA group automatically resets.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the ima autoreset command to enable the auto reset function of an IMA group.

Step 2 Run the show board command to query the attribute of an IMA group.

----End

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
13 Configuring IMA Upstream Transmission Configuration Guide

Example
To enable the auto reset function of an IMA group, do as follows:
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#ima autoreset 1
{on,off}:on
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#show board 0/0
Frame Slot Board Type Board State Subboard Type PVC Number
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------
0 0 IMA Normal H521APCA 1
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------

IMA state:
----------
GroupId Block Loopback Scramble CRC4 AutoReset Switch
------- -------- ------------ -------- ---- ----------------
1 No No loopback No No On
------- -------- ------------ -------- ---- ----------------
LinkId Tx Block Rx Block
------ ------------ ------------
1 No No
2 No No
3 No No
4 No No
------ ------------ ------------

Related Operation
Table 13-6 lists the related operation for setting the auto reset function of an IMA group, do as
follows:

Table 13-6 Related operation for setting the auto reset function of an IMA group

To... Run the Command...

Query the attribute of an IMA group show board

Reset an IMA group reset group

13.8 Disabling the UTOPIA Port


Disabling the UTOPIA port in IMA upstream transmission can prohibit services when you locate
a fault or a port owes fees. After the UTOPIA port is disabled, the services corresponding to the
port are interrupted.

Context
By default, the UTOPIA port is enabled when the system starts. When the system configuration
data is saved, the disabled settings of the UTOPIA port are not saved.

CAUTION
Disabling the UTOPIA port will interrupt services. Perform this operation with caution.

13-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 13 Configuring IMA Upstream Transmission

Procedure
Step 1 Run the shutdown utopia-port command to disable the UTOPIA port.
Step 2 Run the show board command to query the information about the UTOPIA port.
----End

Example
To disable UTOPIA port 1, do as follows:
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#shutdown utopia-port 1
Are you sure to shutdown?(y/n) [n]:y
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#show board 0/0
Frame Slot Board Type Board State Subboard Type PVC Number
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------
0 0 IMA Normal H521APCA 1
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------

IMA state:
----------
GroupId Block Loopback Scramble CRC4 AutoReset Switch
------- -------- ------------ -------- ---- ----------------
1 No No loopback No No On
------- -------- ------------ -------- ---- ----------------
LinkId Tx Block Rx Block
------ ------------ ------------
1 No No
2 No No
3 No No
4 No No
------ ------------ ------------

E1 alarm state:
---------------
PORT LOS LFA RRA LMFA AIS CRC4
---- ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
1 NO NO NO NO NO NO
2 NO NO NO NO NO NO
3 NO NO NO NO NO NO
4 NO NO NO NO NO NO
-----------------------------------------------------------

Clock source: Link 1

Logic state:
----------
ATM's utopia port state: open

xDSL's utopia port state: O --- open, C --- close


--------------------------------------------------------------
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
C O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
--------------------------------------------------------------
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
--------------------------------------------------------------
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
--------------------------------------------------------------
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
--------------------------------------------------------------

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
13 Configuring IMA Upstream Transmission Configuration Guide

The loopbacked xDSL port:


--------------------------------
No xDSL port loopbacked.

Related Operation
Table 13-7 lists the related operation for disabling the UTOPIA port.

Table 13-7 Related operation for disabling the UTOPIA port

To... Run the Command...

Query the information about the show board


UTOPIA port

Enable the UTOPIA port no shutdown utopia-port

13.9 Configuring the IMA Loopback


Configuring the IMA loopback involves configuring the line interface unit (LIU) loopback and
configuring the logic loopback. Configuring the IMA loopback interrupts services.

13.9.1 Configuring the LIU Loopback


Configuring the LIU loopback can be used to check a fault in the line. If the line is in the normal
state, the cells sent are equal to the cells received after being looped back. You can check whether
a fault in the downstream line exists (by using the local loopback) or a fault in the upstream line
exists (by using the remote loopback). After the LIU loopback is set, normal services are
terminated.
13.9.2 Configuring the Logic Loopback
By configuring the logic loopback of an IMA group, you can compare the transmitted Ethernet
frames with the received ones to judge whether the link is normal, that is, to check whether a
fault occurs in the line. After the logic loopback is configured, normal services are terminated.

13.9.1 Configuring the LIU Loopback


Configuring the LIU loopback can be used to check a fault in the line. If the line is in the normal
state, the cells sent are equal to the cells received after being looped back. You can check whether
a fault in the downstream line exists (by using the local loopback) or a fault in the upstream line
exists (by using the remote loopback). After the LIU loopback is set, normal services are
terminated.

Context
l LIU is a line interface unit of the E1 port. It receives and sends ATM cells.
l The LIU loopback includes the local loopback and the remote loopback. In the local
loopback, the cells sent from the xDSL port are returned along the original path from the
LIU. In the remote loopback, the cells sent from the upper layer device are returned along
the original path from the LIU without sending them to the xDSL port. A loopback
command can be used to check a fault in the lines. If the lines are in the normal state, the
cells sent are equal to the cells received after being looped back. You can check whether a

13-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 13 Configuring IMA Upstream Transmission

fault in the downstream line exists (by using the local loopback) or a fault in the upstream
line exists (by using the remote loopback).

CAUTION
The loopback operation interrupts services. Exercise caution when performing the operation.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the loopback liu command to configure the local LIU loopback.
Step 2 Run the show board command to query the LIU loopback state.

----End

Example
To configure the local LIU loopback, do as follows:
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#loopback liu 1
<local|remote|payload>{local,remote,payload}:local
Are you sure to set IMA group loopback?(y/n) [n]:y
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#show board 0/0
Frame Slot Board Type Board State Subboard Type PVC Number
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------
0 0 IMA Normal H521APCA 1
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------

IMA state:
----------
GroupId Block Loopback Scramble CRC4 AutoReset Switch
------- -------- ------------ -------- ---- ----------------
1 No Local No No On
------- -------- ------------ -------- ---- ----------------
LinkId Tx Block Rx Block
------ ------------ ------------
1 No No
2 No No
3 No No
4 No No
------ ------------ ------------

E1 alarm state:
---------------
PORT LOS LFA RRA LMFA AIS CRC4
---- ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
1 NO NO NO NO NO NO
2 NO NO NO NO NO NO
3 NO NO NO NO NO NO
4 NO NO NO NO NO NO
-----------------------------------------------------------

Clock source: Link 1

Logic state:
----------
ATM's utopia port state: open

xDSL's utopia port state: O --- open, C --- close


--------------------------------------------------------------
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
13 Configuring IMA Upstream Transmission Configuration Guide

C O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
--------------------------------------------------------------
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
--------------------------------------------------------------
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
--------------------------------------------------------------
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
--------------------------------------------------------------

The loopbacked xDSL port:


--------------------------------
No xDSL port loopbacked.

Related Operation
Table 13-8 lists the related operation for configuring the LIU loopback.

Table 13-8 Related operation for configuring the LIU loopback


To... Run the Command...

Query the LIU loopback state show board

13.9.2 Configuring the Logic Loopback


By configuring the logic loopback of an IMA group, you can compare the transmitted Ethernet
frames with the received ones to judge whether the link is normal, that is, to check whether a
fault occurs in the line. After the logic loopback is configured, normal services are terminated.

Context
l The MIMA board supports the remote loopback of the xDSL logic port, namely, the remote
loopback from the IMA uplink port to the xDSl port.
l The logic module is the logic processing unit of the ATM. It completes the convergence
and depacketizing of ATM cells between 32 lines of xDSL subscribers and four lines of
E1 ports.

CAUTION
l The loopback operations interrupt the normal services. Exercise caution when performing
these operations.
l The logic loopback is for a PVC. You can set the loopback for a service PVC. Do not set the
loopback for the NMS PVC. Otherwise, the NMS channel is interrupted. When setting the
loopback of a port, check whether the port is configured with the NMS PVC.

13-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 13 Configuring IMA Upstream Transmission

Procedure
Step 1 Run the loopback logic command to set the logic loopback.
Step 2 Run the show board command to query the logic loopback status.

----End

Example
To configure the loopback to logic port 1, do as follows:
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#loopback logic remote 1
Are you sure to set port loopback? (y/n) [n]:y
Set Port loopback successfully.
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#show board
[<frameId[/slotId]>]{(0)[/(0-4)]}:
Frame Frame State
------ -----------
0 NORMAL
-------------------

Related Operation
Table 13-9 lists the related operation for configuring the logic loopback.

Table 13-9 Related operation for configuring the logic loopback


To... Run the Command...

Query the logic loopback status show board

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13-17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 14 Configuring the E1 Upstream Service

14 Configuring the E1 Upstream Service

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the E1 upstream transmission and how to configure the E1 upstream
transmission on the MA5105.

14.1 Overview of the E1 Upstream Service


This section describes the E1 upstream service and its specifications.
14.2 Configuration Example of E1 Upstream Transmission
This operation enables you to configure that services travel upstream through the E1 uplink
board on the MA5105.
14.3 Enabling the CRC4 Function of the E1 Port
This operation enables you to configure the CRC4 function of the E1 port.
14.4 Disabling the E1 Port
This operation enables you to disable the E1 port, namely, the E1 uplink, to prohibit services
when you locate a fault or a port owes fees.
14.5 Disabling the UTOPIA Port
This operation disables the UTOPIA port in E1 upstream transmission to prohibit services when
you locate a fault or a port owes fees.
14.6 Configuring the E1 Loopback
This operation enables you to configure the E1 loopback.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
14 Configuring the E1 Upstream Service Configuration Guide

14.1 Overview of the E1 Upstream Service


This section describes the E1 upstream service and its specifications.

Service Description
The MA5105 supports the MIEA board and provides the E1 ATM UNI upstream service. The
MA5105 shares the SDH transmission resources with the narrowband services. The MA5105
transmits services upstream through the MIEA board. By making full use of the optical
transmission circle of the access network, the MA5105 enables you to reduce the construction
cost for carriers.
The MA5105 transmits services upstream through the MIEA board. By making full use of the
optical transmission circle of the access network, The MA5105 enables you to reduce the
construction cost for carriers.
The MIMA board provides four E1 ports. Each port supports the broadband of 2 Mbit/s.

14.2 Configuration Example of E1 Upstream Transmission


This operation enables you to configure that services travel upstream through the E1 uplink
board on the MA5105.

Networking

Data Plan

Flowchart
Figure 14-1 shows the networking for configuring the E1 upstream transmission.

Figure 14-1 Networking for configuring the E1 upstream transmission

Start

Set the EI port attribute

Configure xDSL

Set up the service PVC

End

14-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 14 Configuring the E1 Upstream Service

NOTE

l The MA5105 connects upstream to the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) transport device through
the MIEA board. The MA5105 connects to PCs of users through the ADCE board.
l The network devices and lines are in the normal state.
l The clock of the E1 port supports only the line recovery clock.

Table 14-1 lists the data plan for configuring the E1 upstream transmission.

Table 14-1 Data plan for the configuring the E1 upstream transmission

Item Data

MIEA Uplink port: 0/0/1


VPI/VCI: 4/220
CRC4: off

ADCE Access port: 0/1/1


VPI/VCI: 0/35

Figure 14-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the E1 upstream transmission.

Figure 14-2 Flowchart for configuring the E1 upstream transmission

Router

BRAS MD5500

E1
SDH
ADM
MA5105
ADM
E1

PC Modem MA5105

Procedure
Step 1 Set the attribute of the E1 port.

The CRC4 function of the E1 port must be the same as that on the peer device.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
14 Configuring the E1 Upstream Service Configuration Guide

huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#no crc4
<portid>{1-4}:1
Disable CRC4 successfully.

Step 2 Configure xDSL.


For how to configure the xDSL line profile and xDSL alarm profile, how to activate the xDSL
port and how to bind the xDSL alarm profile, see "15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service" and
"16 Configuring the SHDSL Service."
This section takes the ADSL access as an example.
Step 3 Set up a service PVC.
huawei(config)#pvc adsl
<FrameId/SlotId/PortId>{(0)/(1-2)/(1-16)}:0/1/1
{<vpi>}{0-15}:0
{<vci>}{32-127}:35
adsl,atm,nms}:atm
<FrameId/SlotId/PortId>{(0)/(0)/(1-4)}:0/0/1
{<vpi>}{0-15}:4
{<vci>}{0-511}:220
<rx-cttr>{1-2}:1
<tx-cttr>{1-2}:1
add PVC successfully, CID = 2.

----End

Result
After the configuration, PCs can access the Internet.

14.3 Enabling the CRC4 Function of the E1 Port


This operation enables you to configure the CRC4 function of the E1 port.

Context
NOTE

When setting the CRC4 function of the E1 port, make sure that it is the same as the settings of the CRC4
function on the peer device. Otherwise, the system generates an alarm.
l The CRC4 function of the E1 port is used to check the correctness of data frames.
l By default, the CRC4 function of the E1 port is enabled.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the crc4 command to enable the CRC4 function.By default, the CRC4 function is disabled.
Step 2 Run the show board command to query the attribute of an IMA group.
Step 3 Run the show board command to query the IMA group attribute.

----End

Example
To enable the CRC4 function of the E1 port, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface atm 0/0
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#crc4

14-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 14 Configuring the E1 Upstream Service

<portId>{1-4}:1
Enable CRC4 successfully.

2007/06/22 14:29:34 major E1: Loss of multiframe alignment(0/0/1)

Related Operation
Table 14-2 lists the related operation for enabling the CRC4 function of the E1 port.

Table 14-2 Related operation for enabling the CRC4 function of the E1 port

To... Run the Command...

Query the attribute of an IMA group show board

14.4 Disabling the E1 Port


This operation enables you to disable the E1 port, namely, the E1 uplink, to prohibit services
when you locate a fault or a port owes fees.

Context
By default, the E1 port is enabled.

CAUTION
When saving the configuration data, the system does not save the settings when the E1 port is
disabled.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the shutdown e1 command to disable the E1 port.

Step 2 Run the show board command to query the status of the E1 port.

Step 3 Run the show board command to query the E1 port status.

----End

Example
To disable the E1 port 1, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface atm 0/0
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#shutdown e1
<portid>{1-4}:1
Are you sure to shutdown?(y/n) [n]:y
Close ETU port successfully.

Related Operation
Table 14-3 lists the related operation for disabling the E1 port.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
14 Configuring the E1 Upstream Service Configuration Guide

Table 14-3 Related operation for disabling the E1 port

To... Run the Command...

Query the status of the E1 port show board

14.5 Disabling the UTOPIA Port


This operation disables the UTOPIA port in E1 upstream transmission to prohibit services when
you locate a fault or a port owes fees.

Context
By default, the xDSL logic port is enabled.

NOTE

When saving the configuration data, the system does not save the settings when the xDSL logic port of the E1
port is disabled.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the shutdown utopia-port command to disable the UTOPIA port.

Step 2 Run the show board command to query the information about the UTOPIA port.

----End

Example
To disable the xDSL logic port, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface atm 0/0
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#shutdown utopia-port
<portid>{1-64}:1
Are you sure to shutdown?(y/n) [n]:y
Close E1 logical UTOPIA port successfully.

Related Operation
Table 14-4 lists the related operation for disabling the UTOPIA port.

Table 14-4 Related operation for disabling the UTOPIA port

To... Run the Command...

Query the information about the show board


UTOPIA port

14.6 Configuring the E1 Loopback


This operation enables you to configure the E1 loopback.

14-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 14 Configuring the E1 Upstream Service

Context
Configuring the E1 loopback involves configuring the line interface unit (LIU) loopback,
configuring the E1 transmission unit (ETU) loopback, and configuring the logic loopback.
14.6.1 Configuring the LIU Loopback
This operation enables you to configure the LIU loopback of the E1 port. By setting the loopback
from the data stream to the LIU, you can check whether a fault occurs in the lines.
14.6.2 Configuring the ETU Loopback
This operation enables you to configure the ETU loopback of the E1 port. By setting the loopback
from the data stream to the LIU, you can check whether a fault occurs in the lines.
14.6.3 Configuring the Logic Loopback
This operation enables you to configure the logic loopback of the E1 port. By setting the loopback
from the data stream to the logic unit, you can check whether a fault occurs in the lines.

14.6.1 Configuring the LIU Loopback


This operation enables you to configure the LIU loopback of the E1 port. By setting the loopback
from the data stream to the LIU, you can check whether a fault occurs in the lines.

Context
l LIU is a line interface unit of the E1 port. It receives and sends ATM cells.
l The LIU loopback includes the local loopback and the remote loopback. In the local
loopback, the cells sent from the xDSL port are returned along the original path from the
LIU. In the remote loopback, the cells sent from the upper layer device are returned along
the original path from the LIU without sending them to the xDSL port. A loopback
command can be used to check a fault in the lines. If the lines are in the normal state, the
cells sent are equal to the cells received after being looped back. You can check whether a
fault in the downstream line exists (by using the local loopback) or a fault in the upstream
line exists (by using the remote loopback).
l A loopback command can be used to check a fault in the lines. If the lines are in the normal
state, the cells sent are equal to the cells received after being looped back. You can check
whether a fault in the downstream line exists (by using the local loopback) or a fault in the
upstream line exists (by using the remote loopback).

CAUTION
l After the LIU loopback is set, the normal services are disabled.
l The loopback operations interrupt the normal services. It is recommended to perform these
operations with caution.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the loopback liu command to configure the LIU loopback.

Step 2 Run the show board command to query the information about the LIU loopback.

----End

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
14 Configuring the E1 Upstream Service Configuration Guide

Example
To configure the local LIU loopback, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface atm 0/0
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#loopback liu
<groupId>{1-1}:1
<local|remote|payload>{local,remote,payload}:local
Are you sure to set IMA group loopback?(y/n) [n]:y
Set loopback successfully.

Related Operation
Table 14-5 lists the related operation for configuring the LIU loopback.

Table 14-5 Related operation for configuring the LIU loopback


To... Run the Command...

Query the information about the LIU show board


loopback

14.6.2 Configuring the ETU Loopback


This operation enables you to configure the ETU loopback of the E1 port. By setting the loopback
from the data stream to the LIU, you can check whether a fault occurs in the lines.

Context
l A loopback command is used in service commissioning.
l The ETU completes the conversion between ATM cells and standard E1 frames.
l The ETU loopback includes local loopback, remote loopback, local_utopia loopback, and
remote_utopia loopback.
l The remote_utopia loopback is for the loopback of the whole UTOPIA port. After the
remote_utopia loopback is enabled, data are sent from the ADSL port to the port that
connects the ETU and the UTOPIA port, and then the data are sent back to the ADSL port.
l The local_utopia loopback identifies ports. After the local_utopia loopback is enabled, data
are sent from the E1 port to the port that connects the LIU and the ETU, and then the data
are sent back to the E1 port.

CAUTION
l A loopback command is used in service commissioning. When running the command, normal
services are interrupted.
l By default, all the loopbacks are disabled when the system starts. When saving configuration
data, the system does not save the loopback settings.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the loopback etu command to configure the ETU loopback.

14-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 14 Configuring the E1 Upstream Service

Step 2 Run the show board command to query the information about the ETU loopback.

----End

Example
To configure the ETU local loopback, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface atm 0/0
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#loopback logic
{local,remote,local_utopia,remote_utopia}:local
<portId>{1-4}:1
Set ETU port loopback successfully.

Related Operation
Table 14-6 lists the related operation for configuring the ETU loopback.

Table 14-6 Related operation for configuring the ETU loopback

To... Run the Command...

Query the information about the ETU show board


loopback

14.6.3 Configuring the Logic Loopback


This operation enables you to configure the logic loopback of the E1 port. By setting the loopback
from the data stream to the logic unit, you can check whether a fault occurs in the lines.

Context
The logic module is the logic processing unit of the ATM. It completes the convergence and
depacketizing of ATM cells between 32 lines of xDSL subscribers and four lines of E1 ports.

CAUTION
l After the logic loopback is set, the normal services are disabled.
l The loopback operations interrupt the normal services. It is recommended that you perform
these operations with caution.
l The logic loopback is for a PVC. You can set the loopback for a service PVC. Do not set the
loopback for the NMS PVC. Otherwise, the NMS channel is interrupted. When setting the
loopback of a port, check whether the port is configured with the NMS PVC.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the loopback logic command to set the logic loopback.
Step 2 Run the show board command to query the information about the logic loopback.

----End

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
14 Configuring the E1 Upstream Service Configuration Guide

Example
To configure the loopback to logic port 1, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface atm 0/0
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#loopback logic
{remote}:remote
<port>{1-64}:1
Are you sure to set port loopback? (y/n) [n]:y
Set Port loopback successfully.

Related Operation
Table 14-7 lists the related operation for configuring the logic loopback.

Table 14-7 Related operation for configuring the logic loopback


To... Run the Command...

Query the information about the logic show board


loopback

14-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service

15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service

About This Chapter

Configuring the ADSL2+ service involves the ADSL2+ technology and the configuration of the
ADSL2+ service on the MA5105.
15.1 Overview of the ADSL2+ Service
Asymmetrical digital subscriber line (ADSL) service is the asymmetrical high-speed dedicated
line access service provided through twisted pairs. ADSL2+ is an extension of the ADSL
technology. ADSL2+ supports up to 24 Mbit/s of downstream rate and 2.5 Mbit/s of upstream
rate. The longest transmission distance can be 6 km.
15.2 Configuration Example of the ADSL2+PPPoE Access Service
This section provides the networking, data plan, configuration procedure, and operation result
to describe the application of the ADSL2+PPPoE access service supported by the MA5105.
15.3 Adding an ADSL2+ Line Profile
The purpose of configuring an ADSL2+ line profile is to configure most parameters of each port
in a profile. If the line profile is configured successfully, the profile can be directly used to
activate the port.
15.4 Adding an ADSL2+ Alarm Profile
Adding an ADSL2+ alarm profile involves setting a series of alarm thresholds to measure and
monitor the performance of an activated ADSL2+ line. When the value of a statistic item reaches
the threshold, the system generates an alarm and sends the alarm to the NMS. After the alarm
profile is configured and bound with a port successfully, the alarm profile can be directly used
to activate the port.
15.5 Activating an ADSL2+ Port
After being activated, an ADSL2+ port can transmit service data in the normal state. If a new
profile is required to be bound with the ADSL port, deactivate the port first. And then, activate
it.
15.6 Binding an ADSL2+ Alarm Profile
After an ADSL2+ alarm profile is bound with an ADSL2+ port, the system generates an alarm
when the value of a statistic item reaches the configured threshold within 15 minutes.
15.7 Blocking an ADSL2+ Port
When you need to pause the services of a user on an ADSL2+ port but not to delete the user,
you can block the ADSL2+ port. After the ADSL2+ port is blocked successfully, the user cannot

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service Configuration Guide

enjoy any service on this port and cannot perform any operation on this port unless the ADSL2
+ port is unblocked.
15.8 Resetting the ADSL2+ Chipset
This topicdescribes how to reset the ADSL2+ chipset. After the resetting, the system
automatically activates the corresponding port.

15-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service

15.1 Overview of the ADSL2+ Service


Asymmetrical digital subscriber line (ADSL) service is the asymmetrical high-speed dedicated
line access service provided through twisted pairs. ADSL2+ is an extension of the ADSL
technology. ADSL2+ supports up to 24 Mbit/s of downstream rate and 2.5 Mbit/s of upstream
rate. The longest transmission distance can be 6 km.

Service Description
For details of ADSL2+, refer to "ADSL2+ Access" in the MA5105 Feature Description.

Service Specifications
The MA5105 provides the ADSL2+ service through the ADCE board. Each shelf of the
MA5105 can house up to four ADCE boards. With each board providing 16 ADSL/ADSL2+
ports, a shelf provides up to 64 ADSL/ADSL2+ ports.

15.2 Configuration Example of the ADSL2+PPPoE Access


Service
This section provides the networking, data plan, configuration procedure, and operation result
to describe the application of the ADSL2+PPPoE access service supported by the MA5105.

Networking

Data Plan

Background

Flowchart
Figure 15-1 shows the networking for configuring the ADSL2+ service.

Figure 15-1 Networking for configuring the ADSL2+ access service

BRAS

ADCE
MFCE
ADCE
MA5105
Modem Modem

PC1 PC2

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service Configuration Guide

Table 15-1 lists the data plan for configuring the ADSL2+ service.

Table 15-1 Data plan for configuring the ADSL2+ access service
Item Data

ADCE PC1 user port: 0/1/0

VPI/VCI: 0/35

Upstream bandwidth: 512 kbit/s


Downstream bandwidth: 1024 kbit/s

MFCE/MFCS/ FE port modes: tagged, 100 M, and full duplex


MFCM
VLAN: 10

The MA5105 can restrict the user bandwidth through a traffic profile or an ADSL2+ line profile.
When both the traffic profile and the ADSL2+ line profile work, the smaller bandwidth specified
in the two profiles is used as the user line bandwidth.
This configuration example takes the configuration of the traffic profile to show how to restrict
user bandwidth. If the qualified rate of the port is lower than 96%, configure the data manually.
If the user bandwidth is insufficient, reconfigure the data of the traffic profile.
Only in the case of deactivated ports, you can bind the line profile to ports.
Figure 15-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the ADSL2+ service.

15-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service

Figure 15-2 Flowchart for configuring the ADSL2+ access service

Start

No
Configure an ADSL2+ line
Proper ADSL2+ line
profile
profile exists?

Yes

Configure an ADSL2+
alarm profile (optional)

Bind the ADSL2+ alarm


profile (optional)

Activate the ADSL port

Set up an ADSL upstream


PVC

End

NOTE

l In this example, all service boards are in the normal state.


l To authenticate users on the broadband remote access server (BRAS) device, configure the name and
password of the access users on the BRAS device. To assign the IP addresses to users through the
BRAS device, configure the corresponding IP address pool on the BRAS device.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure an ADSL2+ line profile.
Use the port rate limit to configure the ADSL line profile. In this profile, set the maximum
downstream rate to 1024 kbit/s, and set the maximum upstream rate to 512 kbit/s.
huawei(config)#adsl line-profile add
[<index>]{2-32}:
During input,press 'Q' to quit,then settings at this time are neglected.
> Select the line profile type 1-adsl 2-adsl2+(1~2) [1]:2
> Will you set basic configuration for modem? (y/n) [n]:

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service Configuration Guide

> Will you set channel mode? (y/n) [n]:


> Will you set interleave delay? (y/n) [n]:
> Please select form of transmit rate adaptation in downstream:
> 0-fixed 1-adaptAtStartup 2-adaptAtRuntime (0~2) [1]:
> Will you set noise margin for modem? (y/n) [n]:
> Will you set parameters for rate? (y/n) [n]: y
> Min bit rate in down stream (32~32000 Kbps) [32]:
> Max bit rate in down stream (32~32000 Kbps) [32000]: 1024
> Min bit rate in up stream (32~3000 Kbps) [32]:
> Max bit rate in up stream (32~3000 Kbps) [3000]: 512
> Please input the profile's name :
Add profile 7 successfully.

Step 2 Configure the ADSL2+ alarm profile (optional).


If the frame loss time exceeds 30s or the error time exceeds 20s, the system generates alarms.
huawei(config)#adsl alarm-profile add
[<index>]{2-33}:
During input,press 'Q' to quit,then settings at this time are neglected.
<ATUC>
> The number of loss of frame seconds(0~900 s) [0]:30
> The number of loss of signal seconds(0~900 s) [0]:
> The number of loss of link seconds(0~900 s) [0]:
> The number of loss of power seconds(0~900 s) [0]:
> The number of errored seconds(0~900 s) [0]:20
> The number of failed fast retrains seconds(0~900 s) [0]:
> The number of severely errored seconds (0~900 s) [0]:
> The number of unavailable seconds(0~900 s) [0]:
> Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit
rate in fast mode(0~31968 Kbps) [0]:
> Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit
rate in interleaved mode(0~31968 Kbps) [0]:
> Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit
rate in fast mode(0~31968 Kbps) [0]:
> Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit
rate in interleaved mode(0~31968 Kbps) [0]:
> Enable or disable the initial failure trap 1-enable 2-disable(1~2) [2]:
<ATUR>
> The number of loss of frame seconds(0~900 s) [0]:
> The number of loss of signal seconds(0~900 s) [0]:
> The number of loss of power seconds(0~900 s) [0]:
> The number of errored seconds(0~900 s) [0]:
> The number of severely errored seconds(0~900 s) [0]:
> The number of unavailable seconds(0~900 s) [0]:
> Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit
rate in fast mode(0~2968 Kbps) [0]:
> Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit
rate in interleaved mode(0~2968 Kbps) [0]:
> Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit
rate in fast mode(0~2968 Kbps) [0]:
> Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit
rate in interleaved mode(0~2968 Kbps) [0]:
> Please input the profile's name :
Add profile 4 successfully.

Step 3 Bind the ADSL2+ alarm profile (optional).


huawei(config)#interface adsl 0/1
huawei(config-ADSL-0/1)#alarm-config 1 profileIndex 4

Step 4 Activate the ADSL port.


The ADSL port and the remote modem activate automatically. Therefore, to bind the configured
line profile, deactivate the port first, and then activate the port again.
huawei(config-ADSL-0/1)#deactivate 1
huawei(config-ADSL-0/1)#activate 1 lineprofileindex 7
huawei(config-ADSL-0/1)#exit
huawei(config)#

15-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service

Step 5 Create the upstream PVC for the ADSL port.


Choose traffic profile 5, whose rate is lower than the maximum rate of the ADSL line profile.
huawei(config)#pvc adsl 0/1/1 0 35
{adsl,shdsl,lan}:lan
<FrameId/SlotId>{(0)/(0-2)}:0/0
<vlanId>{1-4095}:10
<priority>{0-7}:1
{disable,innerVlanID}:innerVlanID
<inner vlanId>{1-4095}:2
<inner vlan priority>{0-7}:1
<inner vlan check>{on,off}:off
<Encap>{1483b,pppoallc,pppoavc}[1483b]:1483b
Add PVC successfully, CID = 1.

Step 6 Save the data.


huawei(config)#save

----End

Result
After the configuration, you can access the Internet from your PC.

15.3 Adding an ADSL2+ Line Profile


The purpose of configuring an ADSL2+ line profile is to configure most parameters of each port
in a profile. If the line profile is configured successfully, the profile can be directly used to
activate the port.

Context
The MA5105 has 33 line profiles in total. Profiles 1 and 33 are the default profiles. Profile 1 is
a common ADSL line profile, and profile 33 is the ADSL2+ line profile. Users can modify the
default line profiles.

l If the adaptation mode of the downstream channel is fixed, the maximum rate of the
downstream channel must be equal to the minimum rate of the downstream channel.
l When setting the upstream and downstream noise margins, comply with the following
principles to set the target noise margin, minimum noise margin, and maximum noise
margin:
– The minimum noise margin must be equal to or smaller than the target noise margin.
– The target noise margin must be equal to or smaller than the maximum noise margin.
l The noise margin for lowering the upstream or downstream transmission rate must be equal
to or larger than the upstream or downstream minimum noise margin and smaller than the
upstream or downstream target noise margin.
l The noise margin for increasing the upstream or downstream transmission rate must be
equal to or smaller than the upstream or downstream maximum noise margin and larger
than the upstream or downstream target noise margin.

Flowchart
The flowchart for configuring an ADSL2+ line profile is as shown in Figure 15-3.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service Configuration Guide

Figure 15-3 Flowchart for configuring an ADSL2+ line profile

Start

Set the index of the line


profile

Select the type of the ADSL


line profile

Perform basic
configuration? No
Yes

Select the ADSL


transmission mode

Whether to adopt the trellis


conding

Set the bit swap function

fast
Select the channel mode

Set the interlleave delay

0-Fixed/1-adapt at startup
Select the adaptation mdoe
for the downstream rate

2-adapt at runtime
Set the SNR margin for the
modem

Set the online adaptation


Set the SNR margin for the
parameters for the dynamic
modem
rate

Set the Min. time for


enabling online rate
adaptation

Set the bit rate in upstream


and downstream

15-8 End Proprietary and Confidential


Huawei Issue 02 (2008-12-12)
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service

Procedure
Step 1 Run the adsl line-profile add command to add an ADSL2+ line profile.

Step 2 Run the show adsl line-profile command to query the information about an ADSL2+ line
profile.

----End

Example
Assume the following:
l The index of an ADSL2+ line profile is automatically assigned by the system
l The maximum downstream interleaved delay is 9 ms
l The maximum upstream interleaved delay is 8 ms
l The minimum downstream transmission rate is 64 kbit/s
l The maximum downstream transmission rate is 2048 kbit/s
l The minimum upstream transmission rate is 32 kbit/s
l The maximum upstream transmission rate is 512 kbit/s
To add such an ADSL2+ line profile, do as follows:
huawei(config)#adsl line-profile add
[<index>]{2-32}:
During input,press 'Q' to quit,then settings at this time are neglected.
> Select the line profile type 1-adsl 2-adsl2+(1~2) [1]:2
> Will you set basic configuration for modem? (y/n) [n]:
> Will you set channel mode? (y/n) [n]:
> Will you set interleave delay? (y/n) [n]:y
> Max down stream interleaved delay(0~255 ms) [6]:9
> Max up stream interleaved delay(0~255 ms) [6]:8
> Please select form of transmit rate adaptation in downstream:
> 0-fixed 1-adaptAtStartup 2-adaptAtRuntime (0~2) [1]:
> Will you set noise margin for modem? (y/n) [n]:
> Will you set parameters for rate? (y/n) [n]: y
> Min bit rate in down stream (32~32000 Kbps) [32]: 64
> Max bit rate in down stream (64~32000 Kbps) [32000]: 2048
> Min bit rate in up stream (32~3000 Kbps) [32]:
> Max bit rate in up stream (32~3000 Kbps) [3000]: 512
> Please input the profile's name :
Add profile 8 successfully.
huawei(config)#show adsl line-profile all
-------- --------- -------- -------- -------- ------ --------
profile operating channel min down max down min up max up
index mode mode rate rate rate rate
(Kbps) (Kbps) (Kbps) (Kbps)
-------- --------- -------- -------- -------- ------ --------
1 All Interleaved 32 6144 32 640
2 All Interleaved 2048 20480 2048 2048
3 All Interleaved 32 6144 32 32
4 All Interleaved 32 6144 32 640
5 All Interleaved 32 2048 32 640
6 All Interleaved 32 6144 32 640
7 All Interleaved 32 1024 32 512
8 All Interleaved 64 2048 32 512
33 All Interleaved 32 32000 32 3000
------------------------------------------------------------------------

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service Configuration Guide

Description
Table 15-2 lists the parameters of an ADSL2+ line profile.

Table 15-2 Parameters of an ADSL2+ line profile


Parameter Description

Index You can enter a profile index, or press Enter to enable the system
to assign a profile index. The assigned profile index is the minimum
index of the idle indexes. The profile index is unique.

Trellis coding The trellis code algorithm can improve SNR and enhance the
stability of the ADSL2+ connection. In general, this function is
enabled.

Upstream/Downstream The change of the ADSL2+ channel attributes causes the SNR of
channel bit swap a certain subcarrier to degrade. When the ADSL2+ channel cannot
support the bits carried on this subcarrier, use the bit swap function
to switch the bits carried on this subcarrier to other subcarriers for
transmission. In this case, the offline faults caused by the channel
attribute change of twisted pairs are reduced. The bit swap function
requires the support of both the ADSL board in offices and the user
RTU.

Channel mode There are two channel modes: interleave mode and fast mode.
l In fast mode, the data transmission delay of ADSL2+ is short
but the stability is poor.
l In interleaved mode, the ADSL connection is stabler but its data
transmission delay increases.
In general, it is recommended to use the interleave mode for
common Internet service and use the fast mode for the delay-
sensitive services, such as the VOD service.

Adapt mode in The ADSL line profile has the following adaptation modes:
downstream/upstream l 0-fixed
l 1-adaptAtStartup
The ADSL2+ line profile has the following adaptation modes:
l 0-fixed
l 1-adaptAtStartup
l 2-adaptAtRuntime

SNR margin for modem The noise margin refers to the extra noise that the system can stand
on the premise of keeping the current rate and bit error rate. The
larger the noise margin, the stabler the line but the lower the
activated physical connection rate.

Minimum SNR margin In the ADSL2+ connection, the port cannot be activated if the
in downstream/ calculated noise margin is smaller than the configured minimum
upstream noise margin.

15-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service

Parameter Description

Maximal SNR margin In the ADSL2+ connection, if the calculated noise margin of an
in downstream/ ADSL2+ line is bigger than the preset maximum noise margin, the
upstream system limits the downstream maximum noise margin to a value
that is bigger than the preset maximum noise margin.

Target SNR margin in The target noise margin refers to the reserved noise margin when
downstream/upstream the data communication is normal. This parameter is designed to
guarantee normal communication if the line noise worsens. This is
a preventive measure. Namely, the bigger the reserved SNR margin
is, the less possible the data transmission errors occur. In this case,
the system is safer but reaches lower rate. In actual application,
choose the noise margin according to the line conditions.

Minimum bit rate in In the process of setting up an ADSL2+ connection, if the


downstream/upstream calculated downstream rate is lower than the preset minimum
value, the port cannot be activated.

Maximum bit rate in In the process of setting up an ADSL2+ connection, if the line is
downstream/upstream in a good condition and the calculated downstream rate of an
ADSL2+ line is higher than the preset maximum value, the system
limits the rate to the maximum value but the noise margin is
increased. If the line is in a poor condition, and the calculated
downstream rate is lower than the preset maximum rate, the system
sets up the ADSL2+ connection at the calculated rate and keeps the
target noise margin.

Related Operation
Table 15-3 lists the related operation for adding an ADSL2+ line profile.

Table 15-3 Related operation for adding an ADSL2+ line profile

To... Run the Command... Remarks

Delete an ADSL2+ line adsl line-profile delete You cannot delete the default
profile line profile or a referenced
line profile.

Modify an ADSL2+ line adsl line-profile modify After the line profile is
profile modified, the system prompts
that the profile immediately
takes effect.

Query the information about show adsl line-profile -


an ADSL2+ line profile

15.4 Adding an ADSL2+ Alarm Profile


Adding an ADSL2+ alarm profile involves setting a series of alarm thresholds to measure and
monitor the performance of an activated ADSL2+ line. When the value of a statistic item reaches
the threshold, the system generates an alarm and sends the alarm to the NMS. After the alarm

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service Configuration Guide

profile is configured and bound with a port successfully, the alarm profile can be directly used
to activate the port.

Context
When configuring the ADSL2+ alarm profile, note that the MA5105 provides an ADSL2+ alarm
profile with the name of AlarmProfile1 and the index of 1.
This alarm profile cannot be deleted but can be modified.

Flowchart
Figure 15-4 shows the flowchart for adding an ADSL2+ alarm profile.

Figure 15-4 Flowchart for adding an ADSL2+ alarm profile

Start

Set the index of the alarm


profile

Set the local alarm


threshold

Set the remote alarm


threshold

Enter the profile name

End

Procedure
Step 1 Run the adsl alarm-profile add command to add an ADSL2+ alarm profile.
Step 2 Run the show adsl alarm-profile command to query the information about an ADSL2+ alarm
profile.

----End

Example
To add an ADSL2+ alarm profile with the index of 2, do as follows:

15-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service

huawei(config)#adsl alarm-profile add 2


During input,press 'Q' to quit,then settings at this time are neglected.
<ATUC>
> The number of loss of frame seconds(0~900 s) [0]: 10
> The number of loss of signal seconds(0~900 s) [0]:
> The number of loss of link seconds(0~900 s) [0]:
> The number of loss of power seconds(0~900 s) [0]: 100
> The number of errored seconds(0~900 s) [0]:
> The number of failed fast retrains seconds(0~900 s) [0]:
> The number of severely errored seconds (0~900 s) [0]:
> The number of unavailable seconds(0~900 s) [0]:
> Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit
rate in fast mode(0~31968 Kbps) [0]: 10
> Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit
rate in interleaved mode(0~31968 Kbps) [0]:
> Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit
rate in fast mode(0~31968 Kbps) [0]:
> Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit
rate in interleaved mode(0~31968 Kbps) [0]:
> Enable or disable the initial failure trap 1-enable 2-disable(1~2) [2]:
<ATUR>
> The number of loss of frame seconds(0~900 s) [0]:
> The number of loss of signal seconds(0~900 s) [0]:
> The number of loss of power seconds(0~900 s) [0]:
> The number of errored seconds(0~900 s) [0]:
> The number of severely errored seconds(0~900 s) [0]:
> The number of unavailable seconds(0~900 s) [0]:
> Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit
rate in fast mode(0~2968 Kbps) [0]: 200
> Threshold of positive difference between the current and the past transmit
rate in interleaved mode(0~2968 Kbps) [0]: 100
> Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit
rate in fast mode(0~2968 Kbps) [0]:
> Threshold of negative difference between the current and the past transmit
rate in interleaved mode(0~2968 Kbps) [0]:
> Please input the profile's name :
Add profile 2 successfully.
huawei(config)#show adsl alarm-profile index 2

ADSL alarm-Profile 2 :
<ATUC>
> The number of loss of frame seconds : 10
> The number of loss of signal seconds : 0
> The number of loss of link seconds : 0
> The number of loss of power seconds : 100
> The number of errored seconds : 0
> The number of failed fast retrains seconds : 0
> The number of severely errored seconds : 0
> The number of unavailable seconds : 0
> Threshold of positive difference between the current and
the past transmit rate in fast mode : 10
> Threshold of positive difference between the current and
the past transmit rate in interleaved mode : 0
> Threshold of negative difference between the current and
the past transmit rate in fast mode : 0
> Threshold of negative difference between the current and
the past transmit rate in interleaved mode : 0
> Enable or disable the initial failure trap : Disable
<ATUR>
> The number of loss of frame seconds : 0
> The number of loss of signal seconds : 0
> The number of loss of power seconds : 0
> The number of errored seconds : 0
> The number of severely errored seconds : 0
> The number of unavailable seconds : 0
> Threshold of positive difference between the current and
the past transmit rate in fast mode : 200
> Threshold of positive difference between the current and
the past transmit rate in interleaved mode : 100

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service Configuration Guide

> Threshold of negative difference between the current and


the past transmit rate in fast mode : 0
> Threshold of negative difference between the current and
the past transmit rate in interleaved mode : 0
> Alarm profile name : Profile2

Description
Table 15-4 lists the parameters of adding an ADSL2+ alarm profile.

Table 15-4 Parameters for adding an ADSL2+ alarm profile


Parameter Description

Profile index You can enter a profile index, or press Enter to


enable the system to assign a profile index. The
assigned profile index is the smallest one of idle
indexes. The profile index is unique.

The number of loss of frame seconds During the 15-minute period of performance data
collection, an alarm is generated if the frame loss
seconds exceeds the configured threshold.
Otherwise, no alarm is generated.

The number of loss of signal seconds During the 15-minute period of performance data
collection, an alarm is generated if the signal loss
seconds exceeds the configured threshold.
Otherwise, no alarm is generated.

The number of loss of link seconds During the 15-minute period of performance data
collection, an alarm is generated if the link failure
seconds exceeds the configured threshold.
Otherwise, no alarm is generated.

The number of loss of power seconds During the 15-minute period of performance data
collection, an alarm is generated if the loss of power
seconds exceeds the configured threshold.
Otherwise, no alarm is generated.

The number of errored seconds During the 15-minute period of performance data
collection, an alarm is generated if the errored
seconds exceeds the configured threshold.
Otherwise, no alarm is generated.

The number of failed fast retrain During the 15-minute period of performance data
seconds collection, an alarm is generated if the failed fast
retraining seconds exceeds the configured threshold.
Otherwise, no alarm is generated.

The number of severely errored During the 15-minute period of performance data
seconds collection, an alarm is generated if the severely
errored seconds exceeds the configured threshold.
Otherwise, no alarm is generated.

15-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service

Parameter Description

The number of unavailable seconds During the 15-minute period of performance data
collection, an alarm is generated if the unavailable
seconds exceeds the configured threshold.
Otherwise, no alarm is generated.

Threshold of positive difference During the 15-minute period of performance data


between the current and the past collection, the line rate is compared with the original
transmit rate in fast mode rate. An alarm is generated if the increased rate
exceeds the configured threshold. Otherwise, no
alarm is generated.

Threshold of negative difference During the 15-minute period of performance data


between the current and the past collection, the line rate is compared with the original
transmit rate in fast mode rate. An alarm is generated if the decreased rate
exceeds the configured threshold. Otherwise, no
alarm is generated.

Threshold of positive difference During the 15-minute period of performance data


between the current and the past collection, the line rate is compared with the original
transmit rate in interleaved mode rate. An alarm is generated if the increased rate
exceeds the configured threshold. Otherwise, no
alarm is generated.

Threshold of negative difference During the 15-minute period of performance data


between the current and the past collection, the line rate is compared with the original
transmit rate in interleaved mode rate. An alarm is generated if the decreased rate
exceeds the configured threshold. Otherwise, no
alarm is generated.

Related Operation
Table 15-5 lists the related operation for configuring an ADSL2+ alarm profile.

Table 15-5 Related operation for configuring an ADSL2+ alarm profile


To... Run the Command... Remarks

Delete an ADSL2+ alarm adsl alarm-profile delete The default alarm profile or
profile an alarm profile in use cannot
be deleted.

Modify an ADSL2+ alarm adsl alarm-profile modify After the profile is modified,
profile the system prompts that the
profile immediately takes
effect.

Query the information about show adsl alarm-profile -


an ADSL2+ alarm profile

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service Configuration Guide

To... Run the Command... Remarks

Bind an ADSL2+ alarm alarm-config The configured ADSL2+


profile alarm profile takes effect
only after it is bound with an
ADSL2+ port.

15.5 Activating an ADSL2+ Port


After being activated, an ADSL2+ port can transmit service data in the normal state. If a new
profile is required to be bound with the ADSL port, deactivate the port first. And then, activate
it.

Prerequisite
The ADSL2+ line profile is configured.
To configure the ADSL2+ line profile, refer to "Port Management" in the MA5105 Command
Reference.

Context
l Activating (or activation) refers to the training between the ATU-C and ATU-R. During
the training process, the system checks the line distance and line state based on settings
contained in the line profile, such as the upstream/downstream line rate and noise margin.
The ADSL2+ office negotiates with the ATU-R to check whether the MA5105 can work
properly under the existing conditions.
l If the training is successful, the ATU-C can communicate with the ATU-R. At this time,
the port works in the activated state, and is ready for service data transmission.
l When the ATU-R is online, the activation process ends upon the completion of the training.
When the ATU-R is offline, the communication is terminated, and the ATU-C is in the
listening state. Once the ATU-R restarts, the training process begins automatically. If the
training is successful, the port is activated.
l To activate an ADSL2+ port, you must bind it with an ADSL2+ line profile. If no profile
index is specified, the system uses the profile bound with the port last time to activate the
ADSL2+ port.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface adsl command to enter the ADSL mode.
Step 2 Run the activate command to activate an ADSL2+ port.
Step 3 Run the show board command to query the information about the activated port.

----End

Example
To activate all ADSL2+ ports in slot 0/1, and bind line profile 1 with the ports, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface adsl 0/1
huawei(config-ADSL-0/1)#activate all 1

15-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service

huawei(config-ADSL-0/1)#show board 0/1


Frame Slot Board Type Board State Interface Type PVC Number
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------
0 2 ADCE Normal - 0
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------

Port State LineProfileId AlarmProfileId Power-backoff Bind


---- --------------- ------------- -------------- ------------- -------
1 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
2 Deactivated 1 1 Default Normal
3 Blocked 1 1 Default Normal
4 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
5 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
6 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
7 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
8 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
9 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
10 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
11 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
12 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
13 Activating 11 1 Default Bind 13
14 Activating 11 1 Default Bind 13
15 Activating 11 1 Default Bind 15
16 Activating 11 1 Default Bind 15

Related Operation
Table 15-6 lists the related operation for activating an ADSL2+ port.

Table 15-6 Related operation for activating an ADSL2+ port

To... Run the Command... Remarks

Deactivate an deactivate For an ADSL2+ port, the connections


ADSL2+ port set up during the activation between the
ATU-C and ATU-R are disconnected
after the deactivation. To transmit
services, activate the port again.

Loop back the loopback -


ADSL2+ port

15.6 Binding an ADSL2+ Alarm Profile


After an ADSL2+ alarm profile is bound with an ADSL2+ port, the system generates an alarm
when the value of a statistic item reaches the configured threshold within 15 minutes.

Prerequisite
The ADSL2+ alarm profile is configured.

For how to configure the ADSL2+ line profile, refer to "Port Management" in the MA5105
Command Reference.

Context
You can set the alarm profile for a port that is activated, deactivated or being activated.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15-17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Run the alarm-config command to bind an alarm profile with an ADSL2+ port.

Step 2 Run the show board command to query the information about the alarm profile bound with the
port.

----End

Example
To bind all ADSL2+ ports in slot 0/1 with alarm profile 2, do as follows:
huawei(config-ADSL-0/1)#alarm-config all 2
huawei(config-ADSL-0/1)#show board 0/1
Frame Slot Board Type Board State Interface Type PVC Number
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------
0 1 ADCE Normal - 44
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------

Port State LineProfileId AlarmProfileId ExtLineProfileId


---- ------------ ------------- -------------- ----------------
1 Deactivated 1 2 -
2 Deactivated 1 2 -
3 Deactivated 1 2 -
4 Deactivated 1 2 -
5 Deactivated 1 2 -
6 Deactivated 1 2 -
7 Deactivated 1 2 -
8 Deactivated 1 2 -
9 Deactivated 1 2 -
10 Deactivated 1 2 -
11 Deactivated 1 2 -
12 Deactivated 1 2 -
13 Deactivated 1 2 -
14 Deactivated 1 2 -
15 Deactivated 1 2 -
16 Deactivated 1 2 -
---------------------------------------------------------------------

Related Operation
Table 15-7 lists the related operation for binding an ADSL2+ alarm profile.

Table 15-7 Related operation for binding an ADSL2+ alarm profile

To... Run the Remarks


Command...

Query the status of the show board This operation is used to query the status
ADSL2+ port of all the configured ADSL2+ ports.

15.7 Blocking an ADSL2+ Port


When you need to pause the services of a user on an ADSL2+ port but not to delete the user,
you can block the ADSL2+ port. After the ADSL2+ port is blocked successfully, the user cannot
enjoy any service on this port and cannot perform any operation on this port unless the ADSL2
+ port is unblocked.

15-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service

Context
l You can perform operations on a port only after the port is unblocked.
l After being unblocked, the port is still in deactivated mode. The port can change to the
activated state only after receiving the activation command.

Procedure
Run the block command to block an ADSL2+ port.

----End

Example
To block port ADSL2+0/1/16, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface adsl 0/1
huawei(config-ADSL-0/1)#block 16
huawei(config-ADSL-0/1)#show board 0/1
Frame Slot Board Type Board State Interface Type PVC Number
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------
0 2 ADCH Offline - 1
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------

Port State LineProfileId AlarmProfileId ExtLineProfileId


---- ------------ ------------- -------------- ----------------
1 Deactivated 33 1 -
2 Activating 33 1 -
3 Activating 33 1 -
4 Activating 33 1 -
5 Activating 33 1 -
6 Activating 33 1 -
7 Activating 33 1 -
8 Activating 33 1 -
9 Activating 33 1 -
10 Activating 33 1 -
11 Activating 33 1 -
12 Activating 33 1 -
13 Activating 33 1 -
14 Activating 33 1 -
15 Activating 33 1 -
16 Blocked 33 1 -
---------------------------------------------------------------------

Related Operation
Table 15-8 lists related operation for blocking an ADSL2+ port.

Table 15-8 Related operation for blocking an ADSL2+ port

To... Run the Remarks


Command...

Unblock an ADSL2+ no block This operation is used to unblock


port ADSL2+ ports.

Query the status of the show board This operation is used to query the status
ADSL2+ port of the blocked ADSL2+ port.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15-19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
15 Configuring the ADSL2+ Service Configuration Guide

15.8 Resetting the ADSL2+ Chipset


This topicdescribes how to reset the ADSL2+ chipset. After the resetting, the system
automatically activates the corresponding port.

Context
l An ADSL2+ board has two chipsets, numbered 1–2. Chipset 1 corresponds to ports 1–8,
and chipset 2 corresponds to ports 9–16.
l The ADCE board does not support the resetting of chipsets.

CAUTION
After the chipset is reset, services are interrupted. Therefore, exercise caution when you reset
the chipset.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface adsl command to enter the ADSL mode.

Step 2 Run the chipset reset command to reset the ADSL2+ chipset.

Step 3 Run the show chipset status command to query the ADSL chipset status.

----End

Example
To reset the chipset 1 of the ADSL2+0/1 board, do as follows:
huawei(config-ADSL-0/1)#chipset reset 1
Are you sure to reset chipset?(y/n) [n]:y
The command have been sent successfully.
huawei(config-ADSL-0/1)#show chipset status
chipset 1 -- good
chipset 2 -- good

Related Operation
Table 15-9 lists related operation for resetting the ADSL2+ chipset.

Table 15-9 Rlated operation for resetting the ADSL2+ chipset

To... Run the Remarks


Command...

Query the status of the show board This operation can queries the status of
ADSL2+ port the ADSL2+ port whose chipset is reset.

15-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 16 Configuring the SHDSL Service

16 Configuring the SHDSL Service

About This Chapter

Configuring the SHDSL service involves the application of the SHDSL technology and how to
configure the SHDSL service on the MA5105.

16.1 Overview of the SHDSL Service


The single-line high speed digital subscriber line (SHDSL) technology provides a symmetric
high rate leased line access service over twisted pairs to meet the requirements of small and
medium enterprises or SOHO subscribers. The SHDSL provides a distance from 3 km to 6 km.
16.2 Configuration Example of the SHDSL PPPoE Service
This section provides the networking, data plan, configuration procedure, and operation result
to describe the application of the single-line high speed digital subscriber line (SHDSL) PPP
over Ethernet (PPPoE) service on the MA5105.
16.3 Adding an SHDSL Line Profile
By configuring the SHDSL line profile of the MA5105, you can configure most of the parameters
of an SHDSL port in an SHDSL line profile. After the line profile is configured successfully,
the line profile can be directly used to activate the port.
16.4 Adding an SHDSL Alarm Profile
The SHDSL alarm profile is used to set a set of alarm thresholds for measuring and monitoring
the performance of an activated SHDSL line. If the SHDSL alarm profile is configured and
bound successfully, the alarm file can be used to activate the port directly. When the value of a
statistic item reaches the threshold, the event is notified to the MA5105 and an alarm is reported
to the NMS.
16.5 Binding an SHDSL Alarm Profile
After an SHDSL alarm profile is bound with a port, the SHDSL alarm profile takes effect after
the port is activated. When an exception occurs in the SHDSL line and reaches the corresponding
statistic threshold configured in the SHDSL alarm profile, the system generates an alarm.
16.6 Activating an SHDSL Port
Before transmitting service traffic, an SHDSL port must be activated. The SHDSL port is bound
with a line profile in port activation. If no profile index is specified, the system uses the profile
bound with the SHDSL port last time to activate the port. If the port is activated for the first
time, the default alarm profile, namely profile 1 is used for activating the port.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
16 Configuring the SHDSL Service Configuration Guide

16.7 Blocking an SHDSL Port


After an SHDSL port is blocked, the SHDSL port is in the blocked state and cannot transmit
services. All operations except the operation of unblocking the SHDSL port will be prohibited.
16.8 Configuring the SHDSL Port Loopback
Configuring the SHDSL port loopback involves the local loopback and the remote loopback.
After configuring the SHDSL port loopback, you can judge whether the link is normal by
comparing the transmitted and received Ethernet frames. After the SHDSL port loopback is
configured, the SHDSL port cannot forwards packets correctly. If the SHDSL port is not isolated,
broadcast storm may occur.
16.9 Configuring the Power Compensation of the SHDSL Port
Power compensation refers to amplifying the signals whose power is attenuated. After the power
compensation of an SHDSL port is configured, the line interference is reduced and the
transmission distance is extended.
16.10 Resetting the SHDSL Chipset
This topicdescribes how to reset the SHDSL chipset.

16-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 16 Configuring the SHDSL Service

16.1 Overview of the SHDSL Service


The single-line high speed digital subscriber line (SHDSL) technology provides a symmetric
high rate leased line access service over twisted pairs to meet the requirements of small and
medium enterprises or SOHO subscribers. The SHDSL provides a distance from 3 km to 6 km.

Service Description
In the SHDSL line, the upstream rate ranges from 192 Kbit/s to 2304 Kbit/s, the downstream
rate is 2312 Kbit/s, and the rate adjusting granularity is 64 bits.
For specification details of the SHDSL, refer to the related chapter"SHDSL Access" in the
MA5105 Feature Description.

Service Specification
The SHDA board of the MA5105 provides the SHDSL service. Each SHDA board provides
16 SHDSL ports.

16.2 Configuration Example of the SHDSL PPPoE Service


This section provides the networking, data plan, configuration procedure, and operation result
to describe the application of the single-line high speed digital subscriber line (SHDSL) PPP
over Ethernet (PPPoE) service on the MA5105.

Networking

Data Plan

Background

Flowchart
Figure 16-1 shows the networking for configuring the SHDSL service.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
16 Configuring the SHDSL Service Configuration Guide

Figure 16-1 Networking for configuring the SHDSL service

BRAS

MA5100

MIMB SHDA
SHDA
SHDA SHDA

MA5605

Modem

Phone

PC

Table 16-1 lists the data plan for configuring the SHDSL service.

Table 16-1 Data plan for configuring the SHDSL service


Item Data

SHDA PC1 port: 0/1/1


Minimum rate: 512 kbit/s
Maximum rate: 1024 kbit/s
VPI/VCI: 0/35

MFCE FE port modes: tagged, 100 M, and full duplex


VLAN: 10

The MA5105 can restrict the user line bandwidth through a specified traffic profile (PVC rate
restriction) or an SHDSL line profile (port rate restriction). When both the traffic profile and the
SHDSL line profile work, the smaller bandwidth specified in the two profiles is used as the user
line bandwidth.
The SHDSL service travels upstream through the MIFE or MFCE board. This section takes the
MFCE board as an example.
Figure 16-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the SHDSL service.

16-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 16 Configuring the SHDSL Service

Figure 16-2 Flowchart for configuring the SHDSL service

Start

No
Proper SHDSL line Configure an SHDSL
profile exists? line profile

Yes

Configure an SHDSL
alarm profile (optional)

Bind the SHDSL alarm


profile

Activate the SHDSL port

Set up the upstream PVC


for the SHDSL service

End

NOTE

The network devices and lines are in the normal state.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the SHDSL line profile.
Use the port rate restriction to configure the SHDSL line profile. In this profile, set the maximum
rate as 512 kbit/s and set the maximum rate as 1024 kbit/s.
huawei(config)#shdsl line-profile add
[<index>]{2-20}:
During input,press 'Q' to quit,then settings at this time are neglected.
> Will you want to create profile with default parameter?(y/n) [n]:
> Will you want to create 4 wire profile?(y/n) [n]:
> SHDSL minimum line (payload) rate(192~2304,2312 kbps) [192]: 512
> SHDSL maximum line (payload) rate(1024~2304,2312 kbps) [2048]: 1024
> Power Spectral Density mode(1--symmetric;2--asymmetric) [1]:
> Transmission mode:

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
16 Configuring the SHDSL Service Configuration Guide

> 1: G.991.2 Annex A


> 2: G.991.2 Annex B
> 3: All(G.991.2 Annex A,G.991.2 Annex B)
> Please select (1~3) [2]:
> Remote enable(1--enabled;2--disabled)[1]:
> Probe enable (1--disabled;2--enabled) [1]:
> Will you config the target SNR margin?(y/n) [n]:
> Please input the profile's name:
Add profile 6 successfully.

Step 2 Configure the SHDSL alarm profile (optional).

When the errored second (ES) exceeds 30 seconds or the unavailable second (UAS) exceeds 20
seconds, the system generates an alarm.
huawei(config)#shdsl alarm-profile add
[<index>]{2-20}:
During input,press 'Q' to quit,then settings at this time are neglected.
> Will you want to create profile with default parameter?(y/n) [n]:
> Loop attenuation threshold(0~127 db) [50]:
> SNR threshold(0~30 db) [1]:
> ES threshold(0~900 s) [0]: 30
> SES threshold(0~900 s) [0]:
> CRC threshold(0~65535) [0]:
> LOSWS threshold(0~900 s) [0]:
> UAS threshold(0~900 s) [0]: 20
> Please input the profile's name:
Add profile 4 successfully.

Step 3 Bind the SHDSL alarm profile (optional).


huawei(config)#interface shdsl 0/1
huawei(config-SHDSL-0/1)#alarm-config 1 profileIndex 4

Step 4 Activate the SHDSL port.

The ADSL port and the remote modem are activated automatically. Therefore, to bind the
configured line profile, deactivate the port first, and then activate the port again.
huawei(config-SHDSL-0/1)#deactivate 1
huawei(config-SHDSL-0/1)#activate 1 lineprofileindex 6
huawei(config-SHDSL-0/1)#exit
huawei(config)#

Step 5 Set up the upstream PVC for the SHDSL service.

Select traffic profile 6. The upstream and downstream rates are larger than those specified in the
SHDSL line profile.
huawei(config)#pvc shdsl 0/3/1 0 35
{adsl,shdsl,atm,nms}:atm
<FrameId/SlotId/PortId>{(0)/(0)/(1-1)}:0/0/1
{<vpi>}{0-255}:4
{<vci>}{32-511}:220
<rx-cttr>{1-50}:6
<tx-cttr>{1-50}:6

Step 6 Save the data.


huawei(config)#save

----End

Result
After the configuration, the user can access the Internet in PPPoE mode.

16-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 16 Configuring the SHDSL Service

16.3 Adding an SHDSL Line Profile


By configuring the SHDSL line profile of the MA5105, you can configure most of the parameters
of an SHDSL port in an SHDSL line profile. After the line profile is configured successfully,
the line profile can be directly used to activate the port.

Background

Flowchart
Each SHDSL line of the MA5105 is associated with a specific channel mode, and is bound with
a line profile. A configuration table of the SHDSL line profile can hold up to 32 line profiles.
The line profile with the index of 1 is the system default line profile that cannot be deleted,
modified, or renamed.
Figure 16-3 shows the flowchart for adding an SHDSL line profile.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
16 Configuring the SHDSL Service Configuration Guide

Figure 16-3 Flowchart for adding an SHDSL line profile

Start

Set the profile index

Yes
Use default data?

No

Set line profile 2

Set the Min. line rate

Set the Max. line rate

Set the power spectral


density mode

Set the transmission mdoe

Set the remote enable


function

Set the query enable


function

Set the SNR No


margin

Yes

Set the SNR margin

Enter the profile name

End

Procedure
Step 1 Run the shdsl line-profile add command to add an SHDSL line profile.
Step 2 Run the show adsl line-profile command to query the information about the SHDSL line profile.
----End

16-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 16 Configuring the SHDSL Service

Example
To add an SHDSL line profile with the index of 3, do as follows:
huawei(config)#shdsl line-profile add
[<index>]{2-20}:3
During input,press 'Q' to quit,then settings at this time are neglected.
>Will you want to create profile with default parameter?(y/n) [n]:
>Will you want to create 4 wire profile?(y/n) [n]:
>SHDSL minimum line (payload) rate(192~2304,2312 kbps) [192]:
>SHDSL maximum line (payload) rate(2312~2304,2312 kbps) [2048]:
>Power Spectral Density mode(1--symmetric;2--asymmetric) [1]:
>Transmission mode:
>1: G.991.2 Annex A
>2: G.991.2 Annex B
>3: All(G.991.2 Annex A,G.991.2 Annex B)
>Please select (1~3) [2]:
>Remote enable(1--enabled;2--disabled)[1]:
>Probe enable (1--disabled;2--enabled) [1]:
> Will you config the target SNR margin?(y/n) [n]: y
> Down stream current SNR margin(0~10 dB) [0]:
> Down stream worst case SNR margin(0~0 dB) [0]:
> Up stream current SNR margin(0~10 dB) [0]:
> Up stream worst case SNR margin(0~0 dB) [0]:
> Target SNR margin used bitmap(0--disable;1--enable):
> bit0--down current
> bit1--down worst
> bit2--up current
> bit3--up worst
> Please select (0x0~0xf) [0x4]:
> Please input the profile's name:
Add profile 3 successfully.
huawei(config)#show shdsl line-profile
{<index>}{1-20}:3
SHDSL Line-profile index 3
>SHDSL wire interface : 2 wire
>SHDSL minimum line (payload) rate(Kbps) : 192
>SHDSL maximum line (payload) rate(Kbps) : 2048
>Transmission mode : G.991.2 Annex B
>Remote enable : Enable
>Probe enable : Disable
>Power spectral density : Symmetric
>Down stream current SNR (dB) : 0
>Down stream worst case SNR(dB) : 0
>Up stream current SNR(dB) : 0
>Up stream worst case SNR(dB) : 0
>Target SNR margin used bitmap : 0x4
>Line profile name : Profile3

Description
Table 16-2 lists the parameters of an SHDSL line profile.

Table 16-2 Parameters of an SHDSL line profile

Parameter Description

ProfileIndex You can enter a profile index or press Enter to enable the
system to allocate a profile index. The profile index is
unique.

G.SHDSL interface mode of Selects the interface mode of a line.


line

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
16 Configuring the SHDSL Service Configuration Guide

Parameter Description

G.SHDSL minimum line rate Specifies the minimum line rate.

G.SHDSL maximum line rate l During the SHDSL connection, if the calculated line rate
exceeds the set maximum rate, the system restricts the
line rate to the set maximum rate but increases the noise
margin.
l If the calculated maximum line rate cannot satisfy the
requirements for the maximum line rate, the system
creates a connection at the calculated rate without
affecting the target noise margin.

Power Spectral Density mode There are two types of PSD: symmetrical and
asymmetrical.

Transmission mode There are three types of SHDSL transmission modes: ITU-
T G.991.2 Annex A, ITU-T G.991.2 Annex B, Annex
A&B.

Remote enable It specifies whether to manage the STU-R.


l enable: It indicates that the remote device management
is enabled.
l disable: It indicates that the remote device management
is disabled.

Downstream/Upstream current The target noise margin refers to the reserved noise margin
target SNR margin when the data communication is normal. This parameter is
designed to guarantee normal communication if the line
noise deteriorates.
This is a preventive measure. The larger the target SNR
margin is, the lower possibility of line error occurrence is,
and the safer the system can be. Meanwhile, the larger the
target SNR margin is, the lower the maximum data
transmission rate is. Therefore, the target SNR margin
must be adjusted based on the actual line conditions.

Downstream/Upstream worst It specifies the downstream/upstream SNR threshold in the


case target SNR margin worst case.

Related Operation
Table 16-3 lists the related operation for adding an SHDSL line profile.

Table 16-3 Related operation for adding an SHDSL line profile


To... Run the Command... Remarks

Delete an SHDSL line profile shdsl line-profile delete The default line profile or a
referenced line profile cannot
be deleted.

16-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 16 Configuring the SHDSL Service

To... Run the Command... Remarks

Modify an SHDSL line shdsl line-profile modify After the line profile is
profile modified, the system prompts
that the profile immediately
takes effect.

Query the information about show shdsl line-profile -


the SHDSL line profile

16.4 Adding an SHDSL Alarm Profile


The SHDSL alarm profile is used to set a set of alarm thresholds for measuring and monitoring
the performance of an activated SHDSL line. If the SHDSL alarm profile is configured and
bound successfully, the alarm file can be used to activate the port directly. When the value of a
statistic item reaches the threshold, the event is notified to the MA5105 and an alarm is reported
to the NMS.

Background

Flowchart
The MA5105 provides an SHDSL alarm profile with the index of 1.
The default alarm profile cannot be deleted, modified, or renamed.
An SHDSL alarm profile is a global profile. That is, one alarm profile can be configured for
multiple SHDSL ports. The SHDSL ports configured with the same SHDSL alarm profile have
the same alarm attributes.
l The system automatically specifies the index of an alarm profile. Therefore, when adding
an alarm profile, you do not need to enter the index of the profile. By default, the target
SNR margin is not configured.
l You need to set the following parameters: loop attenuation threshold, SNR threshold,
severely errored second (SES) threshold, CRC anomalies number threshold, loss of SYNC
failure (LOSW), and unavailable second (UAS) threshold.
l When the threshold of a parameter is set to 0, it indicates that the statistics of the parameter
are not collected and no alarm is reported to the NMS.
Figure 16-4 shows the flowchart for adding an SHDSL alarm profile.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
16 Configuring the SHDSL Service Configuration Guide

Figure 16-4 Flowchart for adding an SHDSL alarm profile

Start

Configrue the SHDSL alarm


profile

Set the alarm profile index

Yes
Use the default data
to create a profile?

No
Set the loop attenuation
threshold

Set the SNR margin


threshold

Set the ES threshold

Set the SES threshold

Set the CRC anomalies


number threshold

Set the LOSWS threshold

Set the UAS threshold

Succeed in adding the


alarm profile

End

16-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 16 Configuring the SHDSL Service

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface shdsl command to enter the SHDSL mode.
Step 2 Run the shdsl alarm-profile add command to add an SHDSL alarm profile.
Step 3 Run the show shdsl alarm-profile command to query the information about the SHDSL alarm
profile.

----End

Example
To add an SHDSL alarm profile with the index of 6, do as follows:
huawei(config)#shdsl alarm-profile add 6
During input,press 'Q' to quit,then settings at this time are neglected.
> Will you want to create profile with default parameter?(y/n) [n]: n
> Loop attenuation threshold(0~127 db) [50]:
> SNR threshold(0~30 db) [1]:
> ES threshold(0~900 s) [0]:
> SES threshold(0~900 s) [0]:
> CRC threshold(0~65535) [0]:
> LOSWS threshold(0~900 s) [0]:
> UAS threshold(0~900 s) [0]:
> Please input the profile's name:
Add profile 6 successfully.
huawei(config)#show shdsl alarm-profile index 6

SHDSL Alarm-profile index 6


> Loop attenuation threshold (db) : 50
> SNR threshold(db) : 1
> ES threshold (second) : 0
> SES threshold (second) : 0
> CRC threshold : 0
> LOSWS threshold (second) : 0
> UAS threshold (second) : 0
> Alarm profile name : Profile6

Description
Table 16-4 lists the parameters of an SHDSL alarm profile.

Table 16-4 Parameters of an SHDSL alarm profile


Parameter Description

Index of an SHDSL alarm You can enter a profile index or press Enter to enable the
profile system to allocate a profile index. The profile index is unique,
and ranges from 2 to 20.

Loop attenuation threshold The system collects the performance data generated within
any 15-minute period. If the loop attenuation exceeds the
threshold, an alarm is generated. If the parameter does not
exceed the threshold, no alarm is generated.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
16 Configuring the SHDSL Service Configuration Guide

Parameter Description

SNR margin threshold The system collects the performance data that is related to
SNR margin and is generated within any 15-minute period. If
the SNR margin exceeds the threshold, an alarm is generated.
If the SNR margin does not exceed the threshold, no alarm is
generated.

ES threshold The system collects the ES-related performance data


generated within any 15-minute period. If the accumulated ES
exceeds the threshold, an alarm is generated. If the
accumulated ES does not exceed the threshold, no alarm is
generated.

SES threshold The system collects the SES-related performance data


generated within any 15-minute period. If the accumulated
SES exceeds the threshold, an alarm is generated. If the
accumulated SES does not exceed the threshold, no alarm is
generated.

CRC anomalies number The system collects the CRC-related performance data
threshold generated within any 15-minute period. If the accumulated
CRC exceeds the threshold, an alarm is generated. If the
accumulated CRC does not exceed the threshold, no alarm is
generated.

LOSW threshold The system collects the LOSW-related performance data


generated within any 15-minute period. If the LOSW exceeds
the threshold, an alarm is generated. If the LOSW does not
exceed the threshold, no alarm is generated.

UAS threshold The system collects the UAS-related performance data


generated within any 15-minute period. If the UAS exceeds
the threshold, an alarm is generated. If the UAS does not
exceed the threshold, no alarm is generated.

Related Operation
Table 16-5 lists the related operation for adding an SHDSL alarm profile.

Table 16-5 Related operation for adding an SHDSL alarm profile


To… Run the Command... Remarks

Delete an SHDSL alarm shdsl alarm-profile delete The default alarm profile or a
profile referenced alarm profile
cannot be deleted.

Modify an SHDSL alarm shdsl alarm-profile modify After the profile is modified,
profile the system prompts that the
profile immediately takes
effect.

16-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 16 Configuring the SHDSL Service

To… Run the Command... Remarks

Query the information about show shdsl alarm-profile -


the SHDSL alarm profile

16.5 Binding an SHDSL Alarm Profile


After an SHDSL alarm profile is bound with a port, the SHDSL alarm profile takes effect after
the port is activated. When an exception occurs in the SHDSL line and reaches the corresponding
statistic threshold configured in the SHDSL alarm profile, the system generates an alarm.

Background
l Only a deactivated port can be bound with an alarm profile.
l By default, if the index of the alarm profile bound with a port is not specified, the index is
that of the profile bound with the port last time. If the port is bound with a profile for the
first time, the alarm profile is profile 1 by default.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface shdsl command to enter the SHDSL mode.

Step 2 Run the alarm-config command to bind an SHDSL alarm profile with a port.

Step 3 Run the show board command to query the profile binding condition of a port.

----End

Example
To bind alarm profile 3 with port 0/1/1, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface shdsl
0/1
huawei(config-SHDSL-0/1)#alarm-config 1 3
huawei(config)#show board 0/1
Frame Slot Board Type Board State Interface Type PVC Number
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------
0 1 SHDSL Normal - 1
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------

Port State LineProfileId AlarmProfileId Power-backoff Bind


---- --------------- ------------- -------------- ------------- -------
1 Activating 1 3 Default Normal
2 Deactivated 1 1 Default Normal
3 Blocked 1 1 Default Normal
4 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
5 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
6 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
7 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
8 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
9 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
10 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
11 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
12 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
13 Activating 11 1 Default Bind 13
14 Activating 11 1 Default Bind 13
15 Activating 11 1 Default Bind 15
16 Activating 11 1 Default Bind 15

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16-15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
16 Configuring the SHDSL Service Configuration Guide

Related Operation
Table 16-6 lists the related operation for binding an SHDSL alarm profile.

Table 16-6 Related operation for binding an SHDSL alarm profile

To... Run the Command...

Query the configuration of an show board


SHDSL port

16.6 Activating an SHDSL Port


Before transmitting service traffic, an SHDSL port must be activated. The SHDSL port is bound
with a line profile in port activation. If no profile index is specified, the system uses the profile
bound with the SHDSL port last time to activate the port. If the port is activated for the first
time, the default alarm profile, namely profile 1 is used for activating the port.

Prerequisite

Background
There is a suitable SHDSL line profile.

l Activation refers to the training performed between the SHDSL transceiver unit - central
office end (STU-C) and the SHDSL transceiver unit - remote end (STU-R). According to
the upstream and downstream line rates and the specified noise margin set in the line profile,
the SHDSL service board detects the line distance and line conditions. Therefore, the STU-
C and the STU-R negotiate the line parameters, and the SHDSL service board confirms
whether the SHDSL port can work in these conditions.
l If the training is successful, the STU-C can communicate with the STU-R. At this point of
time, the port works in the activated state, and is ready for service data transmission.
l When the STU-R is online, the activation process is terminated upon the completion of the
training. When the STU-R gets offline, the communication is terminated, and the STU-C
is in the listening state. When the STU-R goes online, the training process begins
automatically. When the training is successful, the port is activated.
l Before reactivating an SHDSL port, deactivate the port first.
l If you need to use additional parameters for an activated port, you must deactivate the port
first, and then activate it by using the profile with the new parameters.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface shdsl command to enter the SHDSL mode.

Step 2 Run the activate command to activate an SHDSL port.

Step 3 Run the show board command to query the information about the SHDSL port.

----End

16-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 16 Configuring the SHDSL Service

Example
To activate SHDSL port 0/1/1 and bind line profile 2 with the port, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface shdsl 0/1
huawei(config-SHDSL-0/1)#activate 1 2
huawei(config-SHDSL-0/1)#show board 0/1
Frame Slot Board Type Board State Interface Type PVC Number
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------
0 1 SHDA Online - 0
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------

Port State LineProfileId AlarmProfileId ExtLineProfileId


---- ------------ ------------- -------------- ----------------
1 Activating 2 1 -
2 Activating 33 1 -
3 Activating 33 1 -
4 Activating 33 1 -
5 Activating 33 1 -
6 Activating 33 1 -
7 Activating 33 1 -
8 Activating 33 1 -
9 Activating 33 1 -
10 Activating 33 1 -
11 Activating 33 1 -
12 Activating 33 1 -
13 Activating 33 1 -
14 Activating 33 1 -
15 Activating 33 1 -
16 Activating 33 1 -
---------------------------------------------------------------------

Related Operation
Table 16-7 lists the related operation for activating an SHDSL port.

Table 16-7 Related operation for activating an SHDSL port

To… Run the Command...

Deactivate an SHDSL port deactivate

Loop back an SHDSL port loopback

Query the current line status show line current-state

16.7 Blocking an SHDSL Port


After an SHDSL port is blocked, the SHDSL port is in the blocked state and cannot transmit
services. All operations except the operation of unblocking the SHDSL port will be prohibited.

Background
l The port is in the deactivated state after being blocked. Operations through the command
line or the NMS cannot be performed on the port.
l When you save the configuration of the blocked port, the bound line profile and the bound
alarm profile adopt the default values. The system also adopts the default values after
restarting.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16-17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
16 Configuring the SHDSL Service Configuration Guide

l The port needs to be unblocked if you need to reactivate the port. Run the activate command
to activate the port.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface shdsl command to enter the SHDSL mode.
Step 2 Run the block command to block an SHDSL port.
Step 3 Run the show board command to query the current line status.

----End

Example
To block SHDSL port 0/1/1, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface shdsl 0/1
huawei(config-SHDSL-0/1)#block 1
huawei(config-SHDSL-0/1)#show board 0/1
Frame Slot Board Type Board State Interface Type PVC Number
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------
0 1 SHDSL Normal - 1
----- ------ ---------- ------------- --------------- ------------

Port State LineProfileId AlarmProfileId Power-backoff Bind


---- --------------- ------------- -------------- ------------- -------
1 Blocked 1 1 Default Normal
2 Deactivated 1 1 Default Normal
3 Blocked 1 1 Default Normal
4 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
5 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
6 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
7 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
8 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
9 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
10 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
11 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
12 Activating 1 1 Default Normal
13 Activating 11 1 Default Bind 13
14 Activating 11 1 Default Bind 13
15 Activating 11 1 Default Bind 15
16 Activating 11 1 Default Bind 15

Related Operation
Table 16-8 lists the related operation for blocking an SHDSL port.

Table 16-8 Related operation for blocking an SHDSL port


To… Run the Command...

Unblock an SHDSL port no block

Activate an SHDSL port activate

16.8 Configuring the SHDSL Port Loopback


Configuring the SHDSL port loopback involves the local loopback and the remote loopback.
After configuring the SHDSL port loopback, you can judge whether the link is normal by

16-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 16 Configuring the SHDSL Service

comparing the transmitted and received Ethernet frames. After the SHDSL port loopback is
configured, the SHDSL port cannot forwards packets correctly. If the SHDSL port is not isolated,
broadcast storm may occur.

Background
By default, the SHDSL port loopback is disabled.

Local loopback:

l It can be configured only when the port is in the deactivated state.


l You do not need to create an SHDSL link for the test switch chip and the local SHDSL.
l The main purpose of performing this loopback is to check whether the service between the
control board and the board chipset is normal, and whether packet loss exists in the
downstream direction.

Remote loopback:

l It can be configured only when the port in the activated state.


l An SHDSL link must be created for the test switch chip and the remote SHDSL.
l The main purpose of performing this loopback is to check whether the service between the
customer premises equipment (CPE) and the board is normal and whether packet loss exists
in the upstream direction.
NOTE
After the loopback test is complete, run the no loopback command to cancel the loopback in time.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface shdsl command to enter the SHDSL mode.

Step 2 Run the loopback command to configure the SHDSL port loopback.

Step 3 Run the show board command to query the SHDSL port status.

----End

Example
To configure the local loopback for SHDSL port 0/1/0, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface shdsl 0/1
huawei(config-SHDSL-0/1)#loopback local 1
huawei(config-SHDSL-0/1)#show shdsl port state shdsl 0/1/0
{ <cr>|to<K>|Shdsl<K> }:
interface Line- Alarm- --Pvc-- --Car-- enable blocked loopback power-
Profile Profile vpi/vci up/down type backoff
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SHDSL0/1/0 2 2 0/35 36/36 No No local enhanced

Related Operation
Table 16-9 lists the related operation for configuring the SHDSL port loopback.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16-19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
16 Configuring the SHDSL Service Configuration Guide

Table 16-9 Related operation for configuring the SHDSL port loopback
To… Run the Command...

Cancel the SHDSL port no loopback


loopback

Activate an SHDSL port activate

16.9 Configuring the Power Compensation of the SHDSL


Port
Power compensation refers to amplifying the signals whose power is attenuated. After the power
compensation of an SHDSL port is configured, the line interference is reduced and the
transmission distance is extended.

Context
l By default, power compensation is disabled.
l If a port is in the activated state, deactivate the port and then activate it again. In this way,
power compensation can take affect.
l If a port is bound with another port, the configuration of power compensation of the two
ports is changed.
l For an activated port, setting power compensation makes the port deactivated and then
activated.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface shdsl command to enter the SHDSL mode.
Step 2 Run the power-backoff command to configure power compensation of the SHDSL port.

----End

Example
To configure the power compensation of SHDSL port 0/1/1, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface shdsl 0/1
huawei(config-SHDSL-0/1)#power-backoff 1
{default,enhanced}:enhanced
Are you sure to continue?(y/n) [n]:y
Set power backoff successfully.

16.10 Resetting the SHDSL Chipset


This topicdescribes how to reset the SHDSL chipset.

Context
When resetting the chipset, you need to set the eight SHDSL ports on the chipset to the deactive
state. After the chipset resetting, the system automatically adopts the original configuration. For
example, the activated port is in the activated state after the chip resetting.

16-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 16 Configuring the SHDSL Service

WARNING
After the chipset resetting, the service is interrupted. Therefore, reset the chipset with caution.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface shdsl command to enter the SHDSL mode.
Step 2 Run the chipset reset command to reset the SHDSL chipset.

----End

Example
To configure the first chipset of SHDSL slot 0/1, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface shdsl 0/1
huawei(config-SHDSL-0/1)#chipset reset 1
Are you sure to reset chipset?(y/n) [n]:y

Related Operation
Table 16-10 lists the related operation for resetting the SHDSL chipset.

Table 16-10 Related operation for resetting the SHDSL chipset


To… Run the Command...

Activate an SHDSL port activate

Configure the SHDSL port loopback loopback

Block an SHDSL port block

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16-21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 17 Configuring the Multicast Service

17 Configuring the Multicast Service

About This Chapter

Configuring the multicast service involves the application of the multicast service and how to
configure the multicast service on the MA5105.
17.1 Overview of the Multicast Service
The multicast service means that the data is transmitted to multiple receivers in a network through
a transmission stream. That is, the data is delivered to the terminal users of different lines through
different switches.
17.2 Configuration Example of the Multicast Service
This section provides the networking, data plan, configuration procedure, and operation result
to describe the application of the IGMP snooping multicast service.
17.3 Configuring Multicast Attributes
Configuring the multicast attributes involves configuring such multicast attributes as working
mode, VPI/VCI, user leave delay, user query interval, user monitoring switch, .
17.4 Adding a Multicast Program
After a specified program is added to the multicast program library, the multicast user with the
corresponding authority can watch this program.
17.5 Configuring a Multicast Authority Profile
Configuring a multicast authority profile involves adding an authority profile, deleting an
authority profile, or modifying the name of an authority profile.
17.6 Adding a Multicast User
Before a multicast user can watch a multicast program, you need to configure the port connecting
the user line for the multicast user. After a multicast user is added successfully, the multicast
user can watch the multicast program.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
17 Configuring the Multicast Service Configuration Guide

17.1 Overview of the Multicast Service


The multicast service means that the data is transmitted to multiple receivers in a network through
a transmission stream. That is, the data is delivered to the terminal users of different lines through
different switches.

Service Description

With the advent of the multimedia video and data warehouse on the Internet, the multicast service
becomes increasingly popular in service applications. It is widely applied in streaming, remote
learning, video conference, video multicast (Web TV), online games, data copying, and other
point-to-multipoint data transmission.

Service Specifications

The MA5105 supports the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) multicast.

l The MA5105 implements the IGMP multicast by using the xDSL service board, LAN
interface board and upper layer network device (the multicast router).
l Each multicast user can join up to eight multicast groups at a time.
l If the service is transmitted upstream through the FE port, the system supports 64 multicast
channels.
l Each multicast user can join up to eight multicast channels at a time. By default, the user
can join one multicast channel.
l The IGMP V1, IGMP V2 and IGMP V3 protocols are supported.

17.2 Configuration Example of the Multicast Service


This section provides the networking, data plan, configuration procedure, and operation result
to describe the application of the IGMP snooping multicast service.

Prerequisite
l The network devices and lines are in the normal state.
l The multicast source exists in the network and its IP address is known.
l The service boards are in the normal state.

Networking

Data Plan

Flowchart
Figure 17-1 shows the networking for the IGMP snooping multicast service.

17-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 17 Configuring the Multicast Service

Figure 17-1 Networking for the IGMP snooping multicast service

Multicast source

Multicast router

ADCE
MFCE
ADCE
MA5105
Modem Modem

PC1 PC2

Table 17-1 lists the data plan for configuring the IGMP snooping multicast service.

Table 17-1 Data plan for configuring the IGMP snooping multicast service
Item Data

MFCE board FE port mode: tagged, 100 Mbit/s, full duplex

VLAN: 10

Multicast Program 1: 224.1.1.4


program
Program 2: 224.1.1.5

Program 3: 224.1.1.6

ADCE board PC1 port: 0/1/1, VPI/VCI: 0/35

PC2 port: 0/1/2, VPI/VCI: 0/35

Figure 17-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the IGMP snooping multicast service.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
17 Configuring the Multicast Service Configuration Guide

Figure 17-2 Flowchart for configuring the IGMP snooping multicast service

Start

Configure the xDSL port

Configure the uplink port

Configure a service VLAN

Configure a service PVC

Configure the multicast


basic attrobutes

Add channels

Add programs

No
Authenticate users

Yes

Add auth users Add non-auth users

End

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the uplink port.
huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#port mode tagged non-negotiate full-duplex 100m

Step 2 Configure a service VLAN.


huawei(config-LAN-0/0)#vlan 10

17-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 17 Configuring the Multicast Service

Step 3 Configure service PVCs.


huawei(config)#pvc
{adsl,shdsl,lan}:adsl
<FrameId/SlotId/PortId>{(0)/(1-2)/(1-16)}:0/1/1
{<vpi>}{0-127}:0
{<vci>}{32-127}:35
{adsl,shdsl,lan}:lan
<FrameId/SlotId>{(0)/(0-2)}:0/0
{untagged,tagged}:tagged
<vlanId>{1-4095}:10
{1483b,ipoa}:1483b
<priority>{0-7}:1
<rx-car>{off,on}[on]:on
<tx-car>{off,on}[on]:on
<rx-cttr>{1-20}:1
<tx-cttr>{1-20}:1
Add PVC successfully, CID = 1.

huawei(config)#pvc
{adsl,shdsl,lan}:adsl
<FrameId/SlotId/PortId>{(0)/(1-2)/(1-16)}:0/1/2
{<vpi>}{0-127}:0
{<vci>}{32-127}:35
{adsl,shdsl,lan}:lan
<FrameId/SlotId>{(0)/(0-2)}:0/0
{untagged,tagged}:tagged
<vlanId>{1-4095}:10
{1483b,ipoa}:1483b
<priority>{0-7}:1
<rx-car>{off,on}[on]:on
<tx-car>{off,on}[on]:on
<rx-cttr>{1-20}:1
<tx-cttr>{1-20}:1
Add PVC successfully, CID = 1.

Step 4 Configure the multicast basic attributes.


The muticast basic attributes include: multicast mode, multicast VPI/VCI, user leave delay, user
query interval, and user login switch. This example uses the default values.

Step 5 Configure the multicast programs.


Add three programs in the program library. Programs 1 and 2 are bound with authority profile
1. Program 3 is bound with authority profile 2.
huawei(config)#igmp program add 224.1.1.2 new 0x1
huawei(config)#igmp program add 224.1.1.5 newer 0x1
huawei(config)#igmp program add 224.1.1.6 newest 0x2

Step 6 Configure multicast users.


Add multicast user PC1 and bind authority profile 1 with PC1. Users connected to PC1 can
watch up to eight channels at the same time.
huawei(config)#igmp user add port
<frameId/slotId/portId>{(0)/(1-2)/(1-16)}:0/1/1
{profileId,profileName,noauth}:profileid
<id>{1-32}:1
[<maxProgramNum>]{1-8}:8
Add user successfully.

Add a no-auth multicast user PC2. User connected to PC2 can watch up to eight channels at the
same time.
huawei(config)#igmp user add port
<frameId/slotId/portId>{(0)/(1-2)/(1-16)}:0/1/2
{profileId,profileName,noauth}:noauth
[<maxProgramNum>]{1-8}:8
Add user successfully

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
17 Configuring the Multicast Service Configuration Guide

Step 7 Save the data.


huawei(config)#save

Step 8 Configure the user data.

----End

Result
Users connected to PC1 can watch programs 1 and 2 in the program library. Users connected to
PC2 can watch all the three programs.

17.3 Configuring Multicast Attributes


Configuring the multicast attributes involves configuring such multicast attributes as working
mode, VPI/VCI, user leave delay, user query interval, user monitoring switch, .

17.3.1 Configuring the Multicast Working Mode


On the MA5105, the multicast working mode is IGMP snooping. Modifying the multicast
working mode causes the offline state of users.
17.3.2 Configuring the Multicast VPI/VCI
A PVC is a channel carrying multicast data. The MA5105 identifies a channel by using the VPI
and the VCI. PVC on demand can be implemented only when the multicast VPI and VCI are
the same as the VPI and VCI of the ADSL modem.
17.3.3 Configuring User Leave Delay
When multiple terminals connecting to the xDSL port demand a same program, to ensure that
the leaving of one user does not affect the normal program watching of other users, a user leave
delay is required. This helps to check whether there are other users demanding the same program
on the port and to decide whether to delete the port from the multicast group.
17.3.4 Configuring the User Query Interval
After the user query interval is configured, the system queries multicast users according to the
configured interval.
17.3.5 Enabling the Information Function of User Login
After the information function of user login is enabled, the system can monitor the status of users
when they join in or leave from a multicast program.

17.3.1 Configuring the Multicast Working Mode


On the MA5105, the multicast working mode is IGMP snooping. Modifying the multicast
working mode causes the offline state of users.

Context
l The MA5105 adopts IGMP snooping to provide layer 2 multicast management, interception
authentication, and controllable multicast. This effectively restricts the broadcast of
multicast data in the layer 2 network.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the ntv config command to configure the multicast working mode.

17-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 17 Configuring the Multicast Service

Step 2 Run the show ntv config command to query the multicast configuration.

----End

Example
To configure the multicast working mode as IGMP snooping, do as follows:
huawei(config)#ntv config mode igmpsnooping
This operation will cause user offline.Are you sure to continue?(y/n) [n]:y
huawei(config)#show ntv config
NTV mode : IGMP snooping
NTV query interval(s) : 10
NTV querier IP address : 192.168.1.2
NTV max response time(s) : 10
NTV leave delay(ms) : 0
NTV default VLAN ID : 1
NTV default inner VLAN ID : Disable
User monitor switch : on
Multicast VPI : 0
Multicast VCI : 35

Related Operation
Table 17-2 lists the related operation for configuring the multicast working mode.

Table 17-2 Related operation for configuring the multicast working mode
To... Run the Command...

Query the multicast configuration show ntv config

17.3.2 Configuring the Multicast VPI/VCI


A PVC is a channel carrying multicast data. The MA5105 identifies a channel by using the VPI
and the VCI. PVC on demand can be implemented only when the multicast VPI and VCI are
the same as the VPI and VCI of the ADSL modem.

Context
l The VPI is of a numeral type. Its value range is 0–255. The default value is 0.
l The VCI is of a numeral type. Its value range is 32–511. The default value is 35.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the ntv config command to configure the multicast VPI/VCI.
Step 2 Run the show ntv config command to query the multicast configuration.

----End

Example
To configure the multicast VPI/VCI as 0/35, do as follows:
huawei(config)#ntv config vpi 0 vci 35
huawei(config)#show ntv config

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
17 Configuring the Multicast Service Configuration Guide

NTV mode : IGMP


NTV query interval(s) : 10
NTV querier IP address : 10.144.85.55
NTV max response time(s) : 10
NTV leave delay(ms) : 100
User monitor switch : off
Multicast VPI : 0
Multicast VCI : 35

Related Operation
Table 17-3 lists the related operation for configuring the multicast VPI/VCI.

Table 17-3 Related operation for configuring the multicast VPI/VCI

To... Run the Command...

Query the multicast configuration show ntv config

17.3.3 Configuring User Leave Delay


When multiple terminals connecting to the xDSL port demand a same program, to ensure that
the leaving of one user does not affect the normal program watching of other users, a user leave
delay is required. This helps to check whether there are other users demanding the same program
on the port and to decide whether to delete the port from the multicast group.

Context
By default, the user leave delay is 100 ms. The value range of the user leave delay is 0–10000
ms.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the ntv config command to configure the user leave delay.

Step 2 Run the show ntv config command to query the multicast configuration.

----End

Example
To configure the user leave delay as 200 ms, do as follows:
huawei(config)#ntv config leave-delay 200
huawei(config)#show ntv config
NTV mode : IGMP
NTV query interval(s) : 10
NTV querier IP address : 10.144.85.55
NTV max response time(s) : 10
NTV leave delay(ms) : 200
User monitor switch : off
Multicast VPI : 0
Multicast VCI : 35

Related Operation
Table 17-4 lists the related operation for configuring the user leave delay.

17-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 17 Configuring the Multicast Service

Table 17-4 Related operation for configuring the user leave delay.

To... Run the Command...

Query the multicast configuration show ntv config

17.3.4 Configuring the User Query Interval


After the user query interval is configured, the system queries multicast users according to the
configured interval.

Context
The query interval for a multicast user is a numeral type. The value range is 10–40s. The default
value is 10s.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the ntv config command to configure the user query interval.

Step 2 Run the show ntv config command to query the multicast configuration.

----End

Example
To configure the user query interval as 20s, do as follows:
huawei(config)#ntv config query 20
huawei(config)#show ntv config
NTV mode : IGMP
NTV query interval(s) : 20
NTV querier IP address : 10.144.85.55
NTV max response time(s) : 10
NTV leave delay(ms) : 200
User monitor switch : off
Multicast VPI : 0
Multicast VCI : 35

Related Operation
Table 17-5 lists the related operation for configuring the user query interval.

Table 17-5 Related operation for configuring the user query interval

To... Run the Command...

Query the multicast configuration show ntv config

17.3.5 Enabling the Information Function of User Login


After the information function of user login is enabled, the system can monitor the status of users
when they join in or leave from a multicast program.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17-9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
17 Configuring the Multicast Service Configuration Guide

Context
By default, the information function of user login is disabled.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the ntv config command to enable the information function of user login.
Step 2 Run the show ntv config command to query the multicast configuration.

----End

Example
To enable the information function of user login, do as follows:
huawei(config)#ntv config user-monitor on
huawei(config)#show ntv config
NTV mode : IGMP
NTV query interval(s) : 20
NTV querier IP address : 10.144.85.55
NTV max response time(s) : 10
NTV leave delay(ms) : 200
User monitor switch : on
Multicast VPI : 0
Multicast VCI : 35

Related Operation
Table 17-6 lists the related operation for enabling the information function of user login.

Table 17-6 Related operation for enabling the information function of user login
To... Run the Command...

Query the multicast configuration show ntv config

17.4 Adding a Multicast Program


After a specified program is added to the multicast program library, the multicast user with the
corresponding authority can watch this program.

Context
If you need to authenticate multicast users, you must maintain the programs in the program
library.
l The system supports 256 multicast programs in total.
l If you select the index or name of an authority profile for a program, the program is bound
with the authority profile. If you do not select the index or name of an authority profile for
a program, and directly press Enter, the program is not bound with any authority profile.

Context
NOTE

The IP address of a multicast program must be a D class address.

17-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 17 Configuring the Multicast Service

Procedure
Step 1 Run the igmp program add command to add a multicast program.
Step 2 Run the show igmp program command to query the information about the multicast program.

----End

Example
To add a multicast program and configure it so that the system assigns an ID for the program,
do as follows:
huawei(config)#igmp program add 224.1.1.8 sports-1 profileid 1
Add program successfully.Program index is 7.
huawei(config)#show igmp program all
ProgramId ProgramName ProgramIp RightProfileNum
-----------------------------------------------------
1 news-1 224.1.1.1 1
2 news-2 224.1.1.2 2
3 film-2 224.1.1.3 3
4 film-1 224.1.1.16 1
5 arts-2 224.1.1.12 1
6 arts-1 224.1.1.13 1
7 sports-1 224.1.1.8 1
-----------------------------------------------------
Record number: 7

Related Operation
Table 17-7 lists the related operation for adding a multicast program.

Table 17-7 Related operation for adding a multicast program


To... Run the Remarks
Command...

Modify the igmp program You can modify only one attribute at a time.
program attributes modify

Delete a multicast igmp program If the program to be deleted is the one that is
program delete being watched by users, the users are offline
forcibly.

Query the show igmp program The system supports up to 256 multicast
information about a programs.
configured
multicast program

17.5 Configuring a Multicast Authority Profile


Configuring a multicast authority profile involves adding an authority profile, deleting an
authority profile, or modifying the name of an authority profile.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17-11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
17 Configuring the Multicast Service Configuration Guide

Context
You can modify the attributes of an authority profile to add multiple programs for the profile.
By binding authority profiles with a user, the system can control the authority of users for
watching programs. Each user can be bound with up to 128 authority profiles.

Context
NOTE

Pay attention to the following points when configuring a multicast authority profile:
l After a port is bound with an authority profile, the users under that port can watch only the programs of the
multicast group specified by the authority profile. Request for joining the multicast group beyond the profile
authority are rejected.
l The name of an authority profile cannot be the same as that of an existing one. The name of an authority
profile is not case sensitive.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the igmp right-profile command to configure a multicast authority profile.
Step 2 Run the show igmp right-profile command to query the information about the configured
multicast authority profile.

----End

Example
To delete program 5 from an authority profile and add program 2 to the profile, do as follows:
huawei(config)#igmp right-profile profileid 1 delete programid 5
Are you sure to delete this program from the right profile?(y/n) [n]:y
Delete program from right profile successfully.

huawei(config)#igmp right-profile profileid 1 add programid 2


Add program in right profile successfully.

To modify the name of authority profile 32, do as follows:


huawei(config)#igmp right-profile profileid 32 rename profile32-huawei
Modify right profile name successfully
huawei(config)#show igmp right-profile profileid 32
ProfileName UserCount
---------------- ------------
profile32-huawei 2

ProgramMask
--------------------------------------------------------
0x0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000038

Related Operation
Table 17-8 lists the related operation for configuring an authority profile.

17-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 17 Configuring the Multicast Service

Table 17-8 Related operation of configuring an authority profile


To... Run the Remarks
Command...

Query the show igmp right- This command is used to query the information
information about a profile about a configured multicast authority profile.
configured When you need to check the authority of a
multicast authority program watched by users, run this command.
profile

17.6 Adding a Multicast User


Before a multicast user can watch a multicast program, you need to configure the port connecting
the user line for the multicast user. After a multicast user is added successfully, the multicast
user can watch the multicast program.

Context
You need to specify the following parameters when adding a user:
l profileId: ID of an authority profile
l profileName: name of the authority profile
l noauth: If you set the parameter noauth, it means that you do not need to configure the
authority profile. Users can watch any program.
NOTE

Pay attention to the following points when adding a multicast user:


l Each multicast user can join eight multicast channels at a time. By default, the user can join one multicast
channel.
l If you select parameter slot, it means that all the users under a slot are added as multicast users.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the igmp user add command to add a multicast user.
Step 2 Run the show igmp user command to query the multicast user information.

----End

Example
To add ports 0/1/1 and 0/1/2 as multicast users, and set port 0/1/2 as a no-auth multicast user,
do as follows:
huawei(config)#igmp user add port 0/1/1 profileid 32 8
huawei(config)#igmp user add port 0/1/2 noauth 8
huawei(config)#show igmp user all
Slot/Port Auth Block MaxChannel watchingChannel ProfileID
--------- ---- ----- ---------- --------------- ---------
1/1 YES NO 8 0 32
1/2 NO NO 8 0 --
1/3 NO NO 6 0 --
1/4 NO NO 6 0 --
1/5 NO NO 6 0 --

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17-13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
17 Configuring the Multicast Service Configuration Guide

1/6 NO NO 6 0 --
1/7 NO NO 6 0 --
1/8 NO NO 6 0 --
1/9 NO NO 6 0 --
1/10 NO NO 6 0 --
1/11 NO NO 6 0 --
1/12 NO NO 6 0 --
1/13 NO NO 6 0 --
1/14 NO NO 6 0 --
1/15 NO NO 6 0 --
1/16 NO NO 6 0 --
--------- ---- ----- ---------- --------------- ---------
Record number: 16

Related Operation
Table 17-9 lists the related operation for configuring an authority profile.

Table 17-9 Related operation of configuring an authority profile


To... Run the Remarks
Command...

Modify the igmp user modify To modify user attributes means whether to
parameters of the authorize the user, setting the maximum
multicast user number of programs the user can watch, and
modifying the user as an auth user. You can
modify only one attribute of a user at a time.

Delete a multicast igmp user delete If a user does not need the video on demand
user (VOD) service any more, you can delete the
user.

Block/Unblock a igmp user block After a user is blocked, the programs watched
multicast user by the user are interrupted. If the blocked user
requests the VOD service, the system rejects
the request. After the user is unblocked, the
system accepts the request for the VOD
service.

17-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 18 Configuring ATM OAM

18 Configuring ATM OAM

About This Chapter

Configuring ATM OAM involves configuring the attributes of the OAM and inserting an OAM
cell.

18.1 Overview of OAM


With the operation, administration and maintenance (OAM) function, you can collect the
statistics of the bit errors on the physical layer and perform the related operation on the ATM
layer cells. In this way, you can obtain specific information about the network and nodes to
detect network faults and isolate the faulty network, and to monitor the performance of line
connections in real time.
18.2 Configuring the OAM Attribute
After configuring the OAM attribute, you can enable the OAM function, set continuity check
(CC), and set the loopback.
18.3 Enabling the CC Function
When the continuity check (CC) function is enabled, you can check the connectivity of a link.
Before enabling the CC function, configure the OAM attribute of both ends.
18.4 Inserting an OAM Cell
In general, the system sends AIS cells only after it receives AIS cells, physical layer faults, or
ATM layer faults, or when it does not receive continuous CC cells. To facilitate a test, this section
describes how to directly insert or to stop inserting AIS/RDI/CC cells.
18.5 Configuring the OAM Loopback
The OAM loopback function is used for line commissioning before service provisioning.
Configuring the OAM loopback involves configuring the identification of the OAM loopback
point, configuring the OAM cell loopback at the ATM side and configuring the OAM cell
loopback at the xDSL side.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
18 Configuring ATM OAM Configuration Guide

18.1 Overview of OAM


With the operation, administration and maintenance (OAM) function, you can collect the
statistics of the bit errors on the physical layer and perform the related operation on the ATM
layer cells. In this way, you can obtain specific information about the network and nodes to
detect network faults and isolate the faulty network, and to monitor the performance of line
connections in real time.

Service Specifications
When the MIMA board is attached with the APC subboard, the OAM function is supported. The
FE board supports the OAM loopback only at the xDSL user side.
When you set the OAM function, make sure that the connection corresponding to the VPI and
VCI already exists. That is, the corresponding PVC already exists.

18.2 Configuring the OAM Attribute


After configuring the OAM attribute, you can enable the OAM function, set continuity check
(CC), and set the loopback.

Context
l The OAM attribute includes the segment point, end point and segment middle point.
– The segment point cannot terminate end cells. It can terminate all segment cells. After
finding a fault, the segment point inserts downstream an end alarm indication signal
(AIS) cell and then inserts upstream a segment remote defect indication (RDI) cell.
– The end point is the termination point for all OAM cells. It does not continuously
transmit OAM cells. After finding a link fault, the end point does not insert downstream
an OAM cell, but inserts upstream an end remote defect indication cell, and reports the
upstream link fault.
– The segment middle point does not terminate any cells. Segment cells and end cells can
be transparently transmitted. The segment middle point must be configured within a
segment. After finding a fault occurred on the physical layer, the segment middle point
automatically inserts a segment AIS cell and an end AIS cell.
NOTE

l If the CC function is activated, you must deactivate it to delete the OAM configuration of the connection
and the connection point. Otherwise, the OAM configuration cannot be deleted.
l A segment middle point must be configured within the segment. If the segment does not exist, the
middle point of the segment cannot be configured.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the oam attribute command to configure the OAM attribute of a connection point.
Step 2 Run the show oam attribute command to query the OAM attribute of a connection point,
including end point type, error encode type of fault management, activated cell type, alarm status,
and migration time of the alarm status.

----End

18-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 18 Configuring ATM OAM

Example
To configure connection point 4/100 as the end point, do as follows:
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#oam attribute 4 100 end-point
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#show oam attribute
<vpi>{0-255}:4
<vci>{32-1023}:100
End point type : End
Fault management error code type: Default code
Activating cell type : -
FM status : AIS
FM status transfer time : 2007/06/14 09:28:25

Related Operation
Table 18-1 lists the related operation for configuring the OAM attribute.

Table 18-1 Related operation for configuring the OAM attribute

To... Run the Command...

Query the OAM attribute of a connection show oam attribute


point

18.3 Enabling the CC Function


When the continuity check (CC) function is enabled, you can check the connectivity of a link.
Before enabling the CC function, configure the OAM attribute of both ends.

Context
CC cells can interact with each other between segments or end pionts. CC cells have directions.
The end that initiates CC cells is called CCSOURCE end. The end that terminates CC cells is
called CCSINK end. If both ends send CC cells to each other, the CC cells are bidirectional.

NOTE

l The command for activating the CC function can be delivered only when a port is in the normal state.

l When the CC function is deactivated, the CC function of the local end is activated irrespective of whether
the peer end responds or not.
l Before deleting a connection, you need to deactivate the CC function.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the oam cc command to enable the CC function of a connection point.

Step 2 Run the show oam cc command to query the configuration of the CC function. The queried
information includes: CC activation direction, type of CC activation cells, CC activation state,
and CC activation mode.

----End

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
18 Configuring ATM OAM Configuration Guide

Example
Assume that the VC connection point with VPI 3 and VCI 100 is the end point. To enable the
CC function of the end point, do as follows:
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#oam cc 3 100 end-cc
<CCDirection>{btoa,atob,bidirection}:bidirection
[<ConfigMode>]{auto,manual}[manual]:auto
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#show oam cc 3 100
Activating direction: Sink
Activating cell type: End
CC status : Active
CC type : Automatic

Related Operation
Table 18-2 lists the related operation for enabling the CC function.

Table 18-2 Related operation for enabling the CC function


To... Run the Command...

Query the configuration of the CC show oam cc


function

18.4 Inserting an OAM Cell


In general, the system sends AIS cells only after it receives AIS cells, physical layer faults, or
ATM layer faults, or when it does not receive continuous CC cells. To facilitate a test, this section
describes how to directly insert or to stop inserting AIS/RDI/CC cells.

Context
NOTE

l If a connection point is configured with the OAM attribute, it is not allowed to directly insert an OAM cell.
To directly insert an OAM cell to the connection point, delete the OAM attribute of the connection point.
l When an OAM alarm occurs on the upstream and downstream nodes of the connection point, do not run the
command used for inserting AIS/RDI cells. Otherwise, it is possible to cause frequent OAM alarm
switchover on the upstream and downstream nodes.
l Before inserting an OAM cell, make sure that the PVC of a specified connection point already exists and
do not configure the OAM attribute of the connection point.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the oam insert command to insert AIS/RDI/CC cells.
Step 2 Run the show oam insert command to query the status of the inserted OAM cells.

----End

Example
To insert an AIS cell, do as follows:
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#oam insert 3 100 ais seg
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#show oam insert

18-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 18 Configuring ATM OAM

No. VPI/VCI Cell type CP type


---------------------------------------
1 3/100 seg AIS
---------------------------------------
Record number: 1

Related Operation
Table 18-3 lists the related operation for inserting an OAM cell.

Table 18-3 Related operation for inserting an OAM cell

To... Run the Command...

Query the status of the inserted OAM show oam insert


cells of a connection point

18.5 Configuring the OAM Loopback


The OAM loopback function is used for line commissioning before service provisioning.
Configuring the OAM loopback involves configuring the identification of the OAM loopback
point, configuring the OAM cell loopback at the ATM side and configuring the OAM cell
loopback at the xDSL side.

18.5.1 Configuring the Identification of the OAM Loopback Point


Before setting the OAM loopback, you need to configure the identification of the OAM loopback
point.
18.5.2 Configuring the OAM Cell Loopback at the ATM Side
Before setting the OAM cell loopback at the ATM side, you need to specify a loopback point.
The loopback point is identified by a string 32-bit of hexadecimal digits. The first 12 bits
represent the MAC address of the uplink board. The subsequent two bits represent the slot
number of the loopback point. Other bits are invalid.
18.5.3 Configuring the OAM Loopback at the xDSL Side
If services travel upstream through the LAN board on the MA5105, you do not need to specify
the loopback point. The MA5105 supports the OAM cell loopback at the xDSL (ADSL, ADSL2,
ADSL2+, and SHDSL) side.

18.5.1 Configuring the Identification of the OAM Loopback Point


Before setting the OAM loopback, you need to configure the identification of the OAM loopback
point.

Context
l "llid" is the identification of the loopback point. It is a string of 32 characters. On the
MA5105, it has 32 bits in hexadecimal digits. The first 12 bits of "llid" represent the MAC
address of the uplink board. The subsequent two bits represent the slot number
(hexadecimal) of the loopback point. Other bits are invalid. By default, the format of these
bits is 00.
l Specifying "llid" can implement the loopback of the specified point. A shelf can be located
by the MAC address of the control board. A board can be located by the slot number.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18-5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
18 Configuring ATM OAM Configuration Guide

Procedure
Step 1 Run the oam llid command to configure the identification of the loopback point.
Step 2 Run the show oam config command to query the information about the configured OAM cell.

----End

Example
To configure the identification of the OAM loopback point, do as follows:
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#oam llid
<llid>:0x00e0fc0f4c6b00000000000000000000
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#show oam config
LLID: 0x00e0fc0f4c6b00000000000000000000
No. VPI/VCI FM status Type CC Direction CC Status
------------------------------------------------------------------
1 4/ 100 Normal End Sink Active
------------------------------------------------------------------
Record number: 1

Related Operation
Table 18-4 lists the related operation for configuring the identification of the OAM loopback
point.

Table 18-4 Related operation for configuring the identification of the OAM loopback point
To... Run the Command...

Query the information about configured show oam config


OAM cells

18.5.2 Configuring the OAM Cell Loopback at the ATM Side


Before setting the OAM cell loopback at the ATM side, you need to specify a loopback point.
The loopback point is identified by a string 32-bit of hexadecimal digits. The first 12 bits
represent the MAC address of the uplink board. The subsequent two bits represent the slot
number of the loopback point. Other bits are invalid.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the oam loopback command to set the OAM cell loopback at the ATM side.
Step 2 Run the show oam config command to query the information about the configured OAM cell
loopback at the ATM side.

----End

Example
To configure the OAM cell loopback at the ATM side, do as follows:
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#oam loopback 3 100
{seg-loopback,end-loopback,app-loopback}:app-loopback
<llId>:0x00e0fc0f4c6b00000000000000000000

18-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide 18 Configuring ATM OAM

<times>{1-10}:5
huawei(config-ATM-0/0)#show oam config
LLID: 0x00e0fc0f4c6b00000000000000000000

No. VPI/VCI FM status Type CC Direction CC Status


------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0/ 35 AIS End Sink Active
------------------------------------------------------------------
Record number: 1

Related Operation
Table 18-5 lists the related operation for configuring the OAM cell loopback at the ATM side.

Table 18-5 Related operation for configuring the OAM cell loopback at the ATM side
To... Run the Command...

Query the OAM cell loopback at the show oam config


ATM side

18.5.3 Configuring the OAM Loopback at the xDSL Side


If services travel upstream through the LAN board on the MA5105, you do not need to specify
the loopback point. The MA5105 supports the OAM cell loopback at the xDSL (ADSL, ADSL2,
ADSL2+, and SHDSL) side.

Context
The loopback point is identified by a string of 32-bit hexadecimal digits. The first 12 bits
represent the MAC address of the uplink board. The subsequent two bits represent the slot
number of the loopback. Other bits are invalid.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the oam loopback command to set the OAM cell loopback at the xDSL side.
Step 2 Run the show oam config command to query the information about the configured OAM cell
loopback at the xDSL side.

----End

Example
To configure the OAM cell loopback at the xDSL side, do as follows:
huawei(config-ADSL-0/1)#oam loopback 1 0 35 seg-loopback 3
huawei(config-ADSL-0/1)#show oam config
LLID: 0x00e0fc0f4c6b00000000000000000000
No. VPI/VCI FM status Type CC Direction CC Status
------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0/ 35 Normal End Sink Active
------------------------------------------------------------------
Record number: 1

Related Operation
Table 18-6 lists the related operation for configuring the OAM cell loopback at the xDSL side.

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18-7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
18 Configuring ATM OAM Configuration Guide

Table 18-6 Related operation for configuring the OAM cell loopback at the xDSL side
To... Run the Command...

Query the OAM cell loopback at the show oam config


xDSL side

18-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide A Acronyms & Abbreviations

A Acronyms & Abbreviations

A
AAA authentication, authorization and accounting
ABR area border router
ACL access control list
ADSL asymmetrical digital subscriber line
ARP Address Resolution Protocol
AS autonomous system
ATM asynchronous transfer mode

B
BMS HUAWEI iManager N2000 broadband integrated network management
system
BRAS broadband remote access server

C
CAR committed access rate
CLI command line interface
CoS class of service
CPE customer premises equipment
CRC cyclic redundancy code

D
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
A Acronyms & Abbreviations Configuration Guide

DHCP
DHCP relay agent option 82
option82
DNS domain name server
DSLAM digital subscriber line access multiplexer
DSP digital signal processor

E
EMU environment monitoring unit

F
FE fast Ethernet
FTP File Transfer Protocol

G
GE gigabit Ethernet

I
IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol
IGP Interior Gateway Protocol
IP Internet Protocol
IPoA Internet Protocol over ATM
IPoE IP over Ethernet
ISP Internet service provider

L
LAN local area network
LSP label switched path
LSR label switched router
LOSW loss of SYNC failure

M
MIB management information base
MIP maintenance association interspace point

A-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide A Acronyms & Abbreviations

MoIP modem over IP


MRU maximum receive unit
MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTU maximum transmission unit

N
NMS network management system

O
OAM operation, administration and maintenance
OSPF open shortest path first

P
PPPoA Point-to-Point Protocol over ATM
PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
PQ priority queuing
PPP Peer-Peer Protocol
PSTN public switched telephone network

Q
QoS quality of service

R
RADIUS remote authentication dial in user service
RARP Reverse Address Resolution Protocol
RFC remote feature control
RIP Routing Information Protocol
RTP Real Time Protocol

S
SHDSL single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential A-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
A Acronyms & Abbreviations Configuration Guide

SSH secure shell


STP spanning tree protocol

T
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol
TTL time to live

U
UDP User Datagram Protocol

V
VLAN virtual LAN
VOD video on demand

A-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide Index

Index

A command mode switching, 2-3


command modes overview, 2-3
accessible address segment configuring help mode, 2-14
configuring, 11-2 configuring number of lines, 2-16
activating configuring system name, 2-11
log host, 4-5 configuring telnet authority, 2-16
activating ADSL2+ port, 15-16 display character, 2-6
activating SHDSL port, 16-16 edit function, 2-5
adding enabling interactive mode, 2-10
log host, 4-3 error prompt, 2-7
adding ADSL2+ alarm profile, 15-12 intelligent matching, 2-4
adding ADSL2+ line profile, 15-7 obtaining online help information, 2-9
adding IMA group, 13-6 overview, 2-2
adding IMA link, 13-10 querying board CPU utilization, 2-14
adding multicast program, 17-10 querying history command, 2-13
adding multicast user, 17-13 querying version information, 2-13
adding service board, 6-2 saving history commands, 2-6
adding SHDSL alarm profile, 16-11 saving system data, 2-17
adding SHDSL line profile, 16-7 searching for command, 2-15
adding user, 5-2 service description, 2-2
ADSL2+ service specifications, 2-2
configuring access service, 15-3 setting system time, 2-11
overview, 15-3 setting timeout exit time, 2-12
service description, 15-3 smart input, 2-6
service specifications, 15-3 switching terminal language, 2-11
ATM traffic profile testing network status, 2-18
configuring, 7-7 CLI feature, 2-2
configuring
B accessible address segment, 11-2
ADSL2+ service, 15-1
binding ATM traffic profile, 7-7
PVC and IP Address, 9-5 forwarding range, 12-10
PVC and MAC Address, 9-6 IMA LIU loopback, 13-14
binding ADSL2+ alarm profile, 15-17 IMA logic loopback, 13-16
binding SHDSL alarm profile, 16-15 inband NMS PVC, 3-19
blocking ADSL2+ port, 15-18 inband NMS VLAN, 3-21, 3-21
blocking SHDSL port, 16-17 IP address of inband interface, 3-17
LAN port mode, 12-7
C LAN traffic profile, 7-9
log host, 4-1, 4-2
CLI MAC address self-learning, 8-2
clearing screen, 2-13 multicast, 17-1
command mode classification, 2-3 multicast authority profile, 17-11
command mode features, 2-3 multicast VPI/VCI, 17-7

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i-1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Index Configuration Guide

multicast working mode, 17-6 log host, 4-4


NMS community name, 3-16 deleting service board, 6-4
OAM attribute, 18-2 deleting user, 5-7
power compensation of SHDSL port, 16-20 disabling E1 port, 14-5
PVC on LAN board, 7-12 disabling LAN port, 12-16
query interval, 17-9 disabling UTOPIA port
service PVC for E1 upstream transmission, 7-10 E1, 14-6
service PVC for IMA upstream transmission, 7-11
service VLAN, 12-9 E
SHDSL port loopback, 16-19
SNMP agent, 3-12 E1
source MAC address filtering, 11-4 configuring upstream service, 14-2
subtending levels, 12-10 E1 port
system route, 3-18 enabling CRC4 function, 14-4
terminal management PVC, 7-13 E1 upstream service
traffic class, 7-6 overview, 14-2
traffic suppression, 12-11 E1 upstream transmission
unacceptable address segment, 11-3 configuring service PVC, 7-10
user leave delay, 17-8 enabling, 17-9
configuring access service CC Function, 18-3
ADSL2+, 15-3 enabling auto reset function, 13-11
SHDSL, 16-3 enabling CAR function, 7-14
configuring aging time enabling CRC4 function, 13-8
of dynamic MAC address, 8-3 enabling PITP, 9-2
configuring E1 port ETU loopback, 14-8 enabling PITP option82 function, 9-3
configuring E1 port LIU loopback, 14-7 enabling scramble function, 13-9
configuring E1 port logic loopback, 14-9
configuring maintenance terminal F
dataplan, 1-9, 1-13
service specifications, 1-8, 1-12 forwarding range
through inband management channel configuring, 12-10
in ATM mode, 1-8
in LAN mode, 1-12 I
through local serial port, 1-2
configuring NMS IGMP snooping
configuring administrator contact information, 3-14 configuring service, 17-2
configuring device location information, 3-15 IMA
configuring trap packets, 3-13 configuring LIU loopback, 13-14
enabling SNMP agent switch, 3-12 configuring logic loopback, 13-16
in ATM mode, 3-4 configuring upstream service, 13-3
in LAN mode, 3-8 disabling UTOPIA port, 13-12
service description, 3-3 overview, 13-3
service specification, 3-3 service specifications, 13-3
configuring PITP IMA upstream transmission
encoding format of, 9-4 configuring service PVC, 7-11
configuring priority, 10-2 inband NMS PVC, 3-19
configuring service information function, 17-9
IGMP snooping, 17-2 inserting
configuring upstream service OAM cell, 18-4
E1, 14-2 IP address of inband interface
IMA, 13-3 configuring, 3-17
LAN, 12-5
L
D LAN
deactivating configuring logic loopback, 12-13
log host, 4-5 configuring PHY loopback, 12-14
deleting configuring upstream service, 12-5

i-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Configuration Guide Index

configuring UTOPIA loopback, 12-15 OAM


disabling UTOPIA port, 12-17 configuring attribute, 18-2
overview, 12-3 overview, 18-2
service description, 12-3 service specifications, 18-2
service specifications, 12-3 OAM cell loopback
LAN port mode configuring at ATM side, 18-6
configuring, 12-7 configuring at xDSL side, 18-7
LAN traffic profile OAM loopback
configuring, 7-9 configuring identification, 18-5
log host overview
activating, 4-5 maintenance terminal, 1-2
adding, 4-3
configuring, 4-2 P
deactivating, 4-5
deleting, 4-4 power compensation of SHDSL port
function, 4-2 configuring, 16-20
overview, 4-2 prohibiting service board, 6-5
PVC
M overview, 7-3
service description, 7-3
MA5105 board service specifications, 7-3
overview, 6-2 PVC concepts, 7-3
service description, 6-2 PVC on LAN board
status, 6-2 configuring, 7-12
MAC address
overview, 8-2 Q
service description, 8-2
service specifications, 8-2 QoS
MAC address self-learning overview, 10-2
configuring, 8-2 service description, 10-2
managing service specifications, 10-2
board, 6-1 query interval
user, 5-1 configuring, 17-9
modifying querying logs, 4-6
user attribute, 5-4
modifying user level, 5-4 R
modifying user password, 5-5
multicast resetting SHDSL chipset, 16-20
service description, 17-2
service specification, 17-2 S
multicast authority profile
configuring, 17-11 service specifications
multicast configuration, 17-1 SHDSL, 16-3
Multicast Service service VLAN
overview, 17-2 configuring, 12-9
multicast VPI/VCI SHDSL
configuring, 17-7 configuring access service, 16-3
multicast working mode overview, 16-3
configuring, 17-6 service description, 16-3
service specifications, 16-3
source MAC address filtering
N configuring, 11-4
NMS subtending levels
configuring community name, 3-16 configuring, 12-10
overview, 3-3 system route
configuring, 3-18
system security
O overview, 11-2

Issue 02 (2008-12-12) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i-3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5105 Multi-service Access Module
Index Configuration Guide

service description, 11-2


service specifications, 11-2

T
terminal management PVC
configuring, 7-13
traffic class
configuring, 7-6
traffic suppression
configuring, 12-11

U
unacceptable address segment
configuring, 11-3
user
telnet login, 5-6
user leave delay
configuring, 17-8
user security
overview, 9-2
service description, 9-2
service specifications, 9-2
users
overview, 5-2
service description, 5-2
service specifications, 5-2

i-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Issue 02 (2008-12-12)


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Potrebbero piacerti anche